JP2018046885A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of checking whether advantageous control is performed based on a predetermined design value.SOLUTION: A main control part 41 is configured to permit navigation notification for reporting an operation mode advantageous to a player by a game auxiliary indicator 12 controlled by a side of the main control part 41. After rotation control of a reel is started following start of a game, stop operation by stop switches is received in a state where predetermined validation conditions are satisfied. Meanwhile, when power supply is resumed after the power supply to a slot machine 1 is stopped in the state where the predetermined validation conditions are satisfied and in a state where the navigation notification is performed, the stop operation by stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is not received during a period from resumption of the power supply to satisfaction of the predetermined validation conditions, the navigation notification is resumed by the game auxiliary indicator 12, and the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is received after the predetermined validation conditions are satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 46

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  This type of gaming machine is controlled to be advantageous to the player based on a predetermined design value (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 5770922

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the game machine is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value after being installed in a game store.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming whether or not it is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value. And

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of means 1 of the present invention is:
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) capable of deriving a display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display portions (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and generating a winning according to the display result,
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
Effect control means (sub-control unit 91) for effecting based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player for deriving the display result;
A notification means (game auxiliary indicator 12) capable of performing notification;
Design value suggesting means (game information display 50) for indicating whether or not the player is advantageously controlled based on the design value;
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Derivation operation enabling means for activating the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means when an activation condition is satisfied after the variable display of the variable display portions (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is started;
Performing control (navigation notification) for notifying operation mode information (navigation number) that can identify the operation mode of the derivation operation unit (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) by the notification unit (game auxiliary indicator 12). Notification control means capable of
Including
The derivation operation enabling means is re-enabled after the power supply is resumed when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped after the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means is validated. Do not validate the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means until the condition is satisfied,
The notification control means performs a control (navigation notification) in which the operation of the derivation operation means is validated and the operation means information (navigation number) is notified by the notification means (game auxiliary indicator 12). When the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in a state where the operation is performed, the notification means (game auxiliary indicator 12) operates at an earlier timing than the operation of the derivation operation means is validated. It is characterized by resuming control (navigation notification) for informing information (navigation number).
According to this feature, by providing the design value suggesting means, it can be confirmed whether or not the player is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in a state where the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled, the derivation operation means is in a period until the activation condition is established again after the power supply is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result from being derived in a situation where it is unknown whether the rotation is normal after the power supply is resumed.
In addition, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in the state where the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled and the control means is informing the operation mode information by the notification means, the derivation is performed. Since the control for notifying the operation mode information by the notification unit is resumed at a timing earlier than the operation of the operation unit being validated, the operation mode information is erroneously notified without the player knowing that the operation mode information has been notified. It is possible to prevent the derivation operation means from being operated in an operation mode other than the operation mode identified by.

The operation mode of the derivation operation unit in the means 1 is an operation mode operated at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode operated in any one of a plurality of operation orders, An operation mode or the like by a combination is applicable.
Further, after the variable display of the variable display unit is started in the means 1, an enabling condition for enabling the operation of the derivation operating means and an effective condition for enabling the operation of the derivation operating means after restarting the power supply The conversion conditions may be the same conditions or different conditions.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM and RAM which a main control part mounts. It is a figure which shows the detail of the memory map of ROM and RAM which a main control part mounts. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game program and a non-game program. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area | region and a non-game area | region. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of processing when a non-game program is called from processing based on a game program during execution of the main processing, and (b) is based on a game program during execution of the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of calling a non game program from a process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initial setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game area initialization process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the non-game area initialization process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the power interruption process (main) which a main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the area | region of RAM which a main control part initializes when the 1st condition and the 2nd condition are satisfied. It is a flowchart which shows the control content at the time of the main control part determining the value of a timer counter. It is a figure which shows the storage area of the timer counter in RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the time counter update process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of the process at the time of calling a non-game program from the process based on a game program during execution of a timer interruption process. It is a figure for demonstrating whether the game state used as a lottery object, a setting difference, the presence or absence of AT lottery, and whether it becomes a navigation object about the lottery object role regarding a replay among the lottery object roles in an internal lottery. The lottery subject in the internal lottery, and for the lottery subject related to the AT control among the lottery subject related to the small role and the special role, the gaming state that is subject to the lottery, the setting difference, the presence of the AT lottery, and the navigation subject It is a figure for demonstrating whether it becomes. Among lottery targets related to small roles and special roles that are subject to lottery in the internal lottery, and for lottery targets that are not related to AT control, the gaming status that is subject to lottery, the setting difference, the presence or absence of AT lottery, and navigation targets It is a figure for demonstrating whether it becomes. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination stopped according to a stop operation aspect by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination stopped according to a stop operation aspect by a lottery object combination. It is a figure which shows the winning number of the special role in the 1st internal winning command which a main control part transmits, the winning number for transmission, and a navigation number. It is a figure which shows the winning number, the winning number for transmission, and the navigation number of the small combination and re-playing combination in the 2nd internal winning command which a main control part transmits. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal winning command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the navigation number alert | reported by a main control part by navigation alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the pushing order command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the satisfaction timing of stop operation validation conditions in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the satisfaction timing of stop operation validation conditions in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the establishment timing of the reel rotation error in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the satisfaction timing of stop operation validation conditions in the reel rotation process after a power failure return. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game auxiliary | assistant display. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect by navigation alerting | reporting. It is a figure which shows the modification 1, 2 of the alerting | reporting aspect by navigation alerting | reporting. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect by error alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of the game auxiliary | assistant display device in a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of the game auxiliary | assistant display before and behind a power failure. It is a timing chart which shows the selection situation of the excitation pattern of a reel motor in game control. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of the game auxiliary | assistant display at the time of error generation. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the control regarding switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary | assistant display. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the modification of the control regarding switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary | assistant display. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing signals input / output between the slot machine and the test apparatus. It is a front view of the housing | casing which shows the internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the totaling method of the data displayed on a gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the data extracted in an extraction process. It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting | reporting aspect by the navigation alert | report in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example replaced with the ring buffer format as a totaling and calculation method of the information regarding a game winning.

  A mode for carrying out a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, a slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a whose front surface is open and a housing 1a. And a front door 1b pivotally supported at the side end.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 3, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “cherry a”, “cherry” are respectively provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “b”, “bell”, “replay a”, “replay b”, and “plum” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided at the approximate center of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4) provided in correspondence with each other, so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuous with the see-through window 3. On the other hand, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped from rotating, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a transmissive liquid crystal panel in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and the transmissive area 51b corresponding to the transmissive window 3 of the display area 51a and the transmissive window 3 are interposed. Thus, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front door 1b, there are a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). Using the MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the maximum bet number among the prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range, setting of medals and bets stored as credits Settlement switch 10 that is operated when the medals used in the game are settled (the medals used for setting credits and bets are returned), start switch 7 that is operated when the game is started, and reels 2L and 2C. Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R operated when stopping the rotation of 2R and an effect switch 56 used for effects can be operated by the player. It is provided.

  In this embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b shows a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning, and the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 for displaying an error code, information for identifying the stop order of reels by navigation notification described later, a 1BETLED 14 for informing that the betting number is set to 1, and 2 betting numbers are set. 2BETLED 15 to notify that the bet is set, 3BETLED 16 to notify that the bet number is set to 3, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted is lit, and the game by operating the start switch 7 A start valid LED 18 for notifying that the start operation is valid by lighting, wait (the previous game (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the beginning) A waiting LED 19 that lights up to indicate that it is in progress, and a replaying LED 20 that lights up to indicate that a replay game is in progress The game display section 13 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the bet amount by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided inside the 8R to notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. An effect LED 56a (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective is provided inside the effect switch 56.

  Inside the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state to be described later and a stop state to be described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value to be described later A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time while checking the set value, and a hit that controls to a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at a predetermined trigger A stop switch 36a for selecting the validity / invalidity of the stop function, automatic control for automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at a predetermined opportunity An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting validity / invalidity of the settlement function, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (described later) provided inside the housing 1a. 2) or a medal payout port 9 for selectively switching to one of the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4, and a medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that has flowed to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector 29 having an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting insertion of a foreign object on the upstream side of the insertion medal sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  In the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. 2, the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are respectively shown. A reel unit 2 comprising detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 (see FIG. 4) for outputting an external output signal, and a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are stored. Hopper tank 34a, a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 4), and a payout sensor 34c for detecting the medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4). A hopper unit 34 and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 4) is provided for detecting that the stored medal has become full.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a function key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. In the setting change state, a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery described later, and a power source that is operated when turning on / off the power source A switch 39 is provided.

  The power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a, and the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation held by a store clerk or the like. The set key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 are operated only by a person such as a store clerk who has the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after the front door 1b is opened by key operation, only the store clerk possessing the key for operating the setting key switch 37 among the game store clerk. Operation is possible.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, is used as the winning line. It has been established. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM1 are set apart from the winning line LN in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of symbols arranged in the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN, the invalid line is displayed. When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) is selected when winning line LN is aligned with any of LM1 to LM4, a symbol that constitutes a specific winning line on winning line LN is displayed. It is easy to recognize that the combination is complete.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, an invalid line LM1 and a lower stage of the reel 2L, which are set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper stage. , The lower line of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, and the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, lower right There are four types of invalid lines LM3 set across straddling symbols LM3, lower stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, upper stage of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set straddling to the right. It is defined as.

  In the present embodiment, as a winning combination, a winning combination is obtained when a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “Bell-Watermelon-Cherry b”) determined as a winning combination in the winning line LN is prepared, and the predetermined symbol is also obtained. When the combinations are aligned, any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 has a combination of symbols (for example, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”) that serves as an index that is easier to recognize than the predetermined symbol combination. The combination which can be shown as having won a prize by the combination of the symbols arranged in any of the above is included. Hereinafter, a combination of symbols that is aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 when a predetermined symbol combination is aligned with the winning line LN is referred to as a symbol combination serving as an index, and constitutes a symbol combination serving as an index. The symbol is called an index symbol.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) predetermined on the winning line is a display result of each reel 2L, 2C and 2R. In the case of a stop, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols.

  In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. Further, one unit of control (game control) for executing a game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

  In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, a configuration using four or more reels may be used. In the configuration using two or more reels, a winning determination may be made based on a combination of display results derived for all two or more reels. In this embodiment, the variable display device is configured by physical reels. However, the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is used. Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The symbols arranged within 5 frames including can be displayed on the winning line.

  Hereinafter, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels unless it is necessary to distinguish between them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C as a middle reel, and the reel 2R as a right reel. Further, an operation for stopping the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are generated. To be supplied. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input. Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, the left The middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R are connected, and the hopper motor 34b described above is connected via the power supply board 101. These electrical components are connected, and are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  Further, in a state where the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a gaming machine information display constituted by a 7-segment display is provided at the lower part on the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. A vessel 50 is arranged. The gaming machine information display 50 can display the display contents from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a, and is totalized by a main control unit 41 described later. The store clerk and the like can recognize information such as the advantageous section ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  The game control board 40 performs processing related to the progress of the game, and at the same time, controls the respective parts of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 directly or indirectly, and becomes an oscillation signal of a predetermined frequency. A control clock generation circuit 42 for generating a control clock CCLK, a random number clock generation circuit 43 for generating a random number clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, and a game control board 40, a switch detection circuit 44 that takes in detection signals input from switches connected directly or via the power supply board 101 and transmits them to the main control unit 41, and a motor drive signal (stepping) output from the main control unit 41. Motor drive circuit 45 for transmitting the motor phase signal) to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 that transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30; and the various displays connected to the game control board 40 with the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 When a voltage drop is detected by monitoring the voltage of the LED drive circuit 47 that transmits to the LED and the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1, a voltage drop signal indicating that is output to the main control unit 41 And a reset circuit 49 that provides a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the power supply is unstable such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a verification block 503, a specific information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, a reset / interrupt controller 506, CPU (Central Processing
Unit) 41a, ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, free-run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509, interrupt controller 510, and parallel input A port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decoding circuit 514 are provided.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests generated inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset / interrupt controller 506 includes an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit that monitors whether the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when it is detected that the user program is executed outside the designated area. The watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a timeout signal for each set period.

  The external bus interface 501 is a bus interface having an interface function between an external bus and an internal bus of a chip constituting the main control unit 41, an address bus, a data bus, and a direction control function of each control signal. The clock circuit 502 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by, for example, dividing the control clock CCLK by two. The verification block 503 is connected to an external verification machine and has a function of performing chip verification. The unique information storage circuit 504 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the main control unit 41. The arithmetic circuit 505 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

  The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b, the variable data writing operation in which the CPU 41a writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 41c and temporarily stores them, and the CPU 41a is temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. A variable data reading operation for reading out various variable data being received, a receiving operation in which the CPU 41a receives input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the parallel input port 511, the serial communication circuit 512, etc. However, a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like is also performed.

  The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The RAM 41c provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period.

  As the free-run counter circuit 507, an 8-bit free-run counter is mounted. The random number circuits 508a and 508b are circuits that generate numerical data that is a random value having a predetermined update range, such as an 8-bit random number or a 16-bit random number. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b among the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a random number for internal lottery described later. The timer circuit 509 is a 16-bit programmable timer, counts down the set timer value based on the input of the control clock CCLK, and outputs an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller when reaching 0000H. In this embodiment, the timer circuit 509 can be used to perform periodic interrupt requests and time measurement.

  The interrupt controller 510 is a circuit that controls external interrupt requests from interrupt terminals and interrupt requests from built-in peripheral circuits (for example, serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509). . The parallel input port 511 incorporates an 8-bit wide input-only port. Also, the parallel output port 513 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 4 incorporates an output-only port having an 11-bit width. The serial communication circuit 512 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in input / output with respect to the outside.

  The address decoding circuit 514 is a circuit for decoding each functional block in the main control unit 41 and a chip select signal that is a decoding signal for an external device. In response to the chip select signal, the internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or the external device serving as a peripheral device is selectively operated effectively and can be accessed from the CPU 41a.

  For example, when the main control unit 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the ROM 41b where no program or the like is stored, the main control section 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the RAM 41c where access is prohibited. In other words, when an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation is made, an illegal access reset is generated to disable the progress of the game. Even if an unauthorized program is stored in an area unrelated to the above, an unused area of the RAM 41c, etc., it is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being executed.

  The main control unit 41 is activated when an internal or external reset occurs. At this time, the value assigned to the ROM 41b and set in the vector table in which the start address of the interrupt process is set. Is a value indicating unused or a value indicating the area where the program etc. is actually stored, and if it is not any value, it will not start, It is possible to prevent in advance the processing that was not originally intended due to the occurrence or the like.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41. In this embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal, but via the serial communication circuit 512. A configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, that is, a configuration in which the command is transmitted as a serial signal may be employed.

  The main control unit 41 also receives detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the parallel input port 511. The main control unit 41 executes main processing that shifts in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from the parallel input port 511. Also, the main control unit 41 can execute the interrupt process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main) is executed every time a time-out occurs in the timer circuit 509, that is, every fixed time interval (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment). In addition, the main control unit 41 is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, a predetermined order is set. The interrupt to be executed with priority is set by. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process ends, the interrupt will occur when the interrupt process ends. The prohibition is automatically released and a new interrupt is generated at that time. Note that other interrupts are set to be automatically disabled during the execution of interrupt processing, and interrupt processing is not automatically canceled when interrupt processing is completed. Other interrupts may be prohibited by the program at the start, and the interrupt prohibition may be canceled by the program at the end of the interrupt process.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main process, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute a process that moves in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time taken to repeat the process repeated in accordance with the control state in the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input. In addition, presentation devices such as a liquid crystal display 51, presentation effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 are connected, and these presentation devices are controlled by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the presentation control board 90. It is driven based on this. In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output control unit may determine the output pattern of the effect device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units. Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer having a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d, and a sub control unit 91 for controlling the effect, and a liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control, an effect effect LED 52, an LED drive circuit 93 for controlling drive of the reel LED 55, a sound output circuit 94 for controlling sound output from the speakers 53, 54, A reset circuit 95 for providing a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time; a switch detection circuit 96 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90; A clock device 97 for outputting time information including date information and time information; A power interruption detection circuit 98 that monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the lot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a when a voltage drop is detected, and other circuits are mounted. Has been.

  The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing an effect in accordance with an effect control program or the like stored in the ROM 91b, and is mounted on the effect control board 90. Control each part of the control circuit directly or indirectly.

  The reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. When the power is turned on, the sub control unit 91 It starts at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power interruption detection circuit 98 has a voltage that outputs a voltage drop signal lower than the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Execute command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the input number of system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 2 ms). Also, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even when the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time. The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in a lottery that affects the player's advantage such as an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated one by one (when the set value 6 is further operated, the set value 1 is set. Return). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed. In addition, since the main control unit 41 initializes the RAM 41c as it shifts to the setting change state, the operation for changing the setting value also functions as an operation for initializing the control state of the main control unit 41. Will be.

  Note that when the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened, and the configuration shifts to the setting change state. Well, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes in a state where the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in the configuration that shifts to the setting change state on the condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 supports the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting change state. Even if the detection is not detected, it is preferable to maintain the setting change state. Thus, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting change, an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed again. This is not necessary, and the setting change operation is not complicated. Further, after the transition to the setting change state, when the setting value is determined by operating the start switch 7 and then the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened. On the condition that the setting change state is terminated, it may be configured to shift to a state in which the game can proceed. Even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is not opened in an unauthorized manner. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  It should be noted that, after the game is over, when the setting key switch 37 is turned on with no bet number set, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b has been opened. In addition, a configuration for shifting to the setting confirmation state may be adopted. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being illegally confirmed without the front door 1b being opened. In addition, in the configuration that shifts to the setting confirmation state on the condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 supports the opening of the front door 1b after the transition to the setting confirmation state. It is preferable to maintain the setting confirmation state even if the detection to be performed is not performed. Thus, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting confirmation, an operation for shifting to the setting confirmation state again is performed. This is not necessary and the setting confirmation operation is not complicated. In addition, after shifting to the setting confirmation state, when the set key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated and the set value is confirmed, the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened. On the condition that the setting confirmation state is terminated, it may be configured to return to a state in which the game can proceed, and even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is not opened in an unauthorized manner. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being confirmed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interruption process (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, a power interruption process (main) for setting data for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the next return is performed. Run.

  Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the RAM 41c data is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state, thereby disabling the progress of the game.

  The error state shifts to a normal error state that is canceled by a reset operation (operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23) and the setting change state described above, and is canceled until a new setting value is set. Special error status with no error, the RAM abnormal error status is a special error status, and once it is controlled to the RAM abnormal error status, it shifts to the setting change status and is released until a new set value is set. It will not be done.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interruption process (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, A power interruption process (sub) for setting data for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the next return is executed.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 returns the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the data of the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the performance is not disabled.

  In addition, even when it is determined that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation, the sub control unit 91 activates when receiving a setting command (described later) indicating that the setting change state has been entered from the main control unit 41. Even when a later-described return command or setting command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has returned is not received even after a certain period of time has elapsed, the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, the execution of the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The usable area in the storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into a game RAM area, an unused area 4, and a non-game RAM area. Further, the game RAM area is divided into a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3 and a game stack area. The special work is a work that stores data that is not initialized even if the setting value is changed, and stores software random numbers, setting values, data indicating a gaming state, and the like. The important work is a work in which data which is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end of a specific gaming state (RB, BB) is stored. The display data of the LED, the input / output data of the input port, the output port, the game time A time counter and the like are stored. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of a specific gaming state, and stores stop symbols, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like. The unused area 3 is a work that is not used by any program. The game stack area is an area in which data saved from a register of the main control unit 41 during execution of a game program to be described later is stored.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 has the data in the RAM 41c when the setting key switch 37 is ON and the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is ON. Each of the initial conditions is established when the five initialization conditions are satisfied, that is, when the setting change state is terminated, when a specific game state (RB, BB) is terminated, or when one game is terminated. Five types of initialization are performed in different areas to be initialized according to the initialization conditions.

  Initialization 0 is initialization that is performed when data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on. In initialization 0, all the usable areas are initialized. . Initialization 1 is initialization that is performed when data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup with the setting key switch 37 being ON. In the initialization 1, an area other than the special work in the game RAM area is not All areas of the game RAM area are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization that is performed after the setting change state is completed by starting with the setting key switch 37 being ON. In initialization 2, special work and game stack areas (in use) in the game RAM area are used. Areas other than) are initialized. Initialization 3 is initialization performed at the end of a specific gaming state. In initialization 3, the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) of the game RAM area are initialized. The storage area for the data indicating the set value and the game state is allocated to the special work, and when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup with the setting key switch 37 being ON, that is, the data in the RAM 41c. When the game is normal and the setting is changed, data indicating the setting value and the gaming state is held. In addition, a storage area for a timer counter, which will be described later, is allocated to an important work and is retained without being initialized at the end of the game or at the end of a specific gaming state.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when performing the above-described initialization, designates a start address and an end address as the initialization target RAM address, so that one byte from the designated start address. After overwriting the data with 0, calculate the logical sum of the 1-byte data, and if the calculation result is 0, repeat the process of moving to the next address until the specified end address is reached. Initialize the RAM area in the specified address range.

  When the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment is activated due to the occurrence of a reset, the main control unit 41 performs setting at the time of activation. In the startup setting, a status flag included in the main control unit 41 is initialized. The status flag is data that holds the state of the operation result and execution result of the instruction, and particularly includes an interrupt master permission flag for setting interrupt prohibition / permission. Since the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating prohibition of interrupt, the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupt is prohibited. Then, after setting various functions with reference to the HW parameters described later, when a reset occurs according to the program stored in the program / data area, it starts in an interrupt-disabled state and then executes first Start the initial setting process.

  In the initial setting process, the main control unit 41 first sets interrupts to be prohibited, and then determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at startup, and the setting key switch 37 is ON in startup. When it is determined that the state is in the state, the process proceeds to the setting change process, and the RAM 41c is initialized at the start of the setting change process. At this time, if the data in the RAM 41c is normal, a part of the control state (setting value, gaming state, etc.) before the change is changed after the setting change by holding the special work and initializing other areas. On the other hand, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c can be surely solved by initializing all the usable areas including the special work. It has become.

  After initialization of the RAM 41c, the interrupt is set to be permitted, the set value is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 6 every time the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and after the start switch 7 is detected ON, The setting value when the setting key switch 37 is detected ON is stored in the RAM 41c, and the setting change process is terminated.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 starts with the interrupt master permission flag indicating that the interrupt is prohibited and is disabled, and in the initial setting process after the start, Since the initial setting process is executed after the interruption is set to be prohibited, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 performs the main process which processes in steps according to progress of a game for every game unit after completion | finish of a setting change process. In the main process, the RAM 41c is initialized for each game unit, and the RAM 41c is also initialized at the end of the setting change process. Then, after the setting change process is completed, the main process is started from a stage before the process of initializing the RAM 41c in the main process. It is possible to perform initialization of the RAM 41c for each process by common processing.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined, and the game is performed on the condition that the prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. Can be started. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set.

  In this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line is activated (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always activated. A winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “combinations” is arranged on the winning line. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

  The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c. Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  Next, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each combination described above before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7 At the time of detection). In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set as the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. And, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, according to the numerical data stored in the lottery work and the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the current gaming state, the number of bets and the set value A determination is made as to whether or not winning is permitted.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined in accordance with the internal lottery target, the current gaming state, and the set value are sequentially assigned to the random number for internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  Then, a winning number indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the RAM 41c. The winning number is used for setting of an internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, and the like.

  When a winning combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined based on the winning number is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special role is elected, the special role winning flag indicating that the special role is elected is set in the special role storing work, and when the general role is elected, the general role is elected. The winning combination flag indicating the general role is set in the general role storing work. If no winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won, the special combination storing work and the general combination storing work are cleared.

  In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not to control the AT in a state that is not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, and whether or not the remaining number of games of the AT is added in the state that is controlled by the AT. It is determined. When the AT is won by internal lottery, the AT is controlled thereafter, and when the addition of the AT remaining game number is won, the number of winning games is added to the AT remaining game number.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. The main control unit 41 displays the winning number, the table index stored in the ROM 41b, and the table creation data when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Referring to this, a stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding symbols, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing in a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, if any of the winning combinations is won, when the stop operation is performed, the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. If possible, control is performed to align and stop, and the winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped without being aligned in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. When a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the maximum on the winning line when the stop operation is performed If it is possible to align and stop the winning roles in the 4-frame pull-in range, control will be performed to align them and stop them, and the winning roles will be selected on the winning line within the maximum 4-frame pull-in range. If it is not possible to withdraw, if a special role that has been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames can be aligned and stopped on the winning line, it will be controlled and stopped. Control to stop without aligning in the drawing range of 4 frames will be performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. In the case where a special combination and a small combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn, and the small combination is not aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special combination. Also, when a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn, the small role is placed on the winning line. You may perform control to align.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the special role and the replaying role are won at the same time, such as when the replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the stop operation is performed. In this case, the control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to 4 frames. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer to be simultaneously elected are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, within 4 frames, for any of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop control is performed by using a stop control table that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. A configuration that performs stop control by specifying the stop position from the table and stopping the reel at the specified stop position, and searching for a stop position that can be stopped when the stop operation is performed without using the stop control table or the stop position table. A configuration that performs stop control that identifies and stops the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, and can be stopped without using the stop control table or the stop position table A configuration that uses stop control by searching and specifying the stop position together, and a configuration that performs stop control by partially changing the stop control table and stop position table. It may be.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 measures the game time, which is the time elapsed from the start of the reel rotation every time the reel starts rotating after the game starts. After a game is over, when a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and the game start operation is enabled, the reel start of the previous game is started. If the game time that has started counting from the time is more than the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), that is, if the specified time has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game, no wait is generated. At that time, the reel for the game in the game is started to rotate. On the other hand, after the end of one game, when a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game is started. If the game time that started timing from the time is less than the specified time, that is, if the specified time has not elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game, a wait is generated and the reel rotation is started at that time. First, it waits until the game time that has started timing from the reel rotation start time of the previous game reaches the specified time, and starts rotating the reel when it reaches the specified time.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs control to output an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like. These external output signals are output to a hall device such as a hall computer via the information output terminal board of the game shop (hall) where the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed.

  The main control unit 41 has a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals awarded to the player due to the occurrence of winning, and the gaming state is RB (regular bonus). RB signal indicating the effect, BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB (big bonus), AT signal indicating the start of AT described later, door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is opened, described later A setting change signal indicating the transition to the setting change mode, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality of the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality of the hopper unit 34 are output.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit, a parallel / serial conversion circuit, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board. Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the AT signal are directly output as pulse signals to the information providing terminal board via the relay circuit. . On the other hand, the door opening signal, setting change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel-serial conversion circuit, and information is provided. Output to the terminal board.

  Next, commands that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 sends the inserted number command, credit command, gaming state command, AT state command, internal winning command, push order command, reel acceleration information command, acceleration completion command to the sub control unit 91. , Stop operation command, sliding frame number command, stop command, game end command, winning judgment command, payout start command, payout end command, standby command, stop command, error command, return command, setting command, setting check command, Send multiple types of commands including door commands. These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the command type and 1-byte extension data indicating the command content, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the command type from the type data.

  The inserted number command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game. Or, when a prescribed number of bets is not set, a medal is inserted, or when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6. The inserted number command is transmitted when the betting number setting operation is performed, so that it is possible to specify that the betting number setting operation has been performed by receiving the inserted number command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game. Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the game state of the game, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The AT state command is a command that can specify whether the AT is in progress, the number of remaining games of the AT, and the like, which will be described later, and is transmitted when the game starts and after the gaming state command.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the game is started by operating the start switch 7 and is transmitted after the AT state command. The internal winning command includes a first internal winning command that can specify whether or not the special combination is won, and a second internal winning command that can specify whether or not the general combination is won, After the first internal winning command is transmitted, the second internal winning command is transmitted.

  The push order command is a command that can specify the stop order, and is when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, after the internal winning command is transmitted, and with the stop operation of each reel Each time control is performed, it is transmitted after a stop command is transmitted. In a game in which navigation notification described later is executed, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted from the start of the game, and in a game in which navigation notification described later is not executed, Until the order is determined, a push order command that cannot specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted, and after a favorable stop order is determined, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted The

  Since the game state command, AT state command, and internal winning command are transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts, the game is started when the start switch 7 is operated by receiving these commands. Can be specified.

  The reel acceleration information command is a command that can specify that the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game, and is transmitted when the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game.

  The acceleration completion command is a command that can specify that the acceleration of the reel accompanying the start of the game has been completed. When the game is started, after the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, Sent when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated at a constant speed.

  The stop operation command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel. Sent every time the accompanying stop control is performed.

  The sliding frame number command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is a left reel, a middle reel, or a right reel, and the number of sliding frames to be moved from when the corresponding reel is stopped until it stops. Each time stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel is performed, the corresponding stop operation command is transmitted after being transmitted.

  The stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is a left reel, a middle reel, or a right reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel. Stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel Is transmitted after the corresponding sliding frame number command is transmitted.

  With the stop operation command, the sliding frame number command, and the stop command, it is possible to specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and accompanying the stop operation of each reel Since it is transmitted every time stop control is performed, by receiving these commands, it is possible to specify that one of the reels has been stopped and the reel to be stopped.

  The game end command is a command that can specify that the game has ended, and is transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line LN, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, so that the player stops the third stop reel. This is when the stop switch is pressed and released, and is transmitted after the game end command is transmitted.

  Both the game end command and the winning determination command are transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and then releases the stop switch. By receiving these commands, It is possible to specify that all operations necessary to advance one game have been completed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The stand-by command is a command indicating a transition to the stand-by state. When one game is over and the bet amount is not set and the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has passed, It is transmitted after the payout of medals by the settlement (including medals used for setting the number of bets) is completed and a payout end command is transmitted.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to the error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence and type of the error condition is sent and reset. When the error state is canceled after the operation is performed, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power interruption.

  The setting command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. When the setting change state is entered, a setting command that indicates the start of the setting change state is transmitted, and when the setting change state ends. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is transmitted. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it can be specified that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of setting. .

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation command that indicates the start of setting confirmation is transmitted when entering the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation end is indicated when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state), when the power is turned on, at the end of one game (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Before the setting can be started) and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

  These commands are generated in the main process or timer interrupt process (main), temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main).

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described. When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub-control unit 91 is the earliest. Based on the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b based on the command received in the stage, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table Performs output control of various rendering devices. In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55, etc. Control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 stores the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among these, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and changes to the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 stores the effect pattern in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received. As a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can provide a notification period in which navigation notification can be executed to notify the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. Can be controlled at an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT).

  When the main control unit 41 controls the AT, the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state, and based on the winning number of the winning navigation notification combination, the player In addition to notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player and transmitting a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player based on the winning number to the sub-control unit 91, the liquid crystal display 51, etc. The navigation effect using is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification and execute a navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in a normal state where the control is not performed by the AT.

  FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the main controller 41 includes a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 41b and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to the RAM 41c.

  The memory area of the ROM 41b includes a program / data area (0000H to 26FFH) in which programs and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area (2700H to 277FH) in which arbitrary data such as a title and version of the program can be set, and a later description. Parameters for setting the hardware table of the vector table area (2780H to 27A7H) in which the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction to be executed and the start address of the timer interrupt process (main) are set, and the internal function of the main control unit 41 HW parameter area (27A8H to 27FFH) in which is set, and an unused area (2800H to 7FFFH) where access is prohibited.

  The parameters set in the HW parameter area in the ROM 41b include the final address (HPRGEND) of the ROM area used in the program / data area, the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the final address (HRAMEND) of the RAM area for which access is prohibited.

  The memory area of the RAM 41c includes a usable area (F000H to F400H) usable as a work and an internal function register area (F4B0H to F4B0H to store a group of registers for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 41. F6FFH) and unused areas (F401H to F4AFH, F700H to FFFFH) where access is prohibited.

  FIG. 7 is an address map of the program / data area in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 and the usable area in the RAM 41c.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, It includes a use area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2. .

  The progress of the game is to advance a series of processes constituting the game. In the case of a slot machine, the stage where the game can be started by setting the number of bets is started and the reel is rotated. A step of stopping the reel, a step of deriving a display result, and a step of assigning a value such as a medal according to the display result.

  A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are allocated separately, and are allocated backward in the storage area of the ROM 41b among the game program area and the non-program area. Since the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more is allocated to the area before the non-program area, a storage area for the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game It can be easily specified according to the difference.

  The game program area and the game data area, the non-game program area and the non-game data area are allocated to continuous areas, respectively, while the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game are not related to the progress of the game. Since the game program and the non-game data area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more, the game program area and game data area related to the progress of the game, and the progress of the game Non-game programs and non-game data areas that are not involved can be easily specified according to the difference in storage areas.

  In the above description, before and after the storage area is a magnitude relationship between the address values assigned to the storage area. The smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. For this reason, the storage area allocated behind the one storage area corresponds to the storage area having an address value larger than that of the one storage area, and the storage area allocated ahead of the one storage area. This corresponds to a storage area having an address value smaller than that of one storage area.

  Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a game program is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area is allocated before the game program allocated behind the non-game program area. A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  Further, the game program area and the non-game program area may be assigned to areas adjacent to each other with the unused area 1 in between, and even in such a structure, the game program area related to the progress of the game Therefore, it is possible to easily identify a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game according to the difference in storage area.

  In addition, in the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, since 0 values are stored in all areas, a game program area and game data area, a non-game program area and non-game data, The unused areas 1 and 2 can be easily distinguished from each other, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, they can be easily found.

  It should be noted that 1 may be stored in all of the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Even in such a configuration, the game program area, the game data area, and the non-game The program area and non-game data can be easily distinguished from the unused areas 1 and 2 and can be easily detected even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2. .

  Further, as long as the game program area and the non-game program area are assigned to separate areas, the game program area and the non-game program area may be assigned to adjacent areas. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to easily identify a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game according to the difference in the storage areas.

  The game program area and the non-game program area both start from an address (0H) having the same lower 4 digits when the address is expressed in binary, and the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Among them, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program area not related to the progress of the game can be easily distinguished from other areas.

  In addition, both the game program area and the non-game program area not only start from an address having the same low-order 4 digit value when the address is expressed in binary, but also the low-order 1 digit value when expressed in hexadecimal. Starts from the same 0 address (0H), so that not only when the address is expressed in binary, but also when it is expressed in hexadecimal, the game program area and the non-game program area are easily distinguished from other areas. can do.

  It should be noted that both the game program area and the non-game program area start from an address having the same value in the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) regardless of whether the address is expressed in binary or hexadecimal. With this configuration, the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas. For example, the value of the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits is the same 1 The same effect can be obtained with a configuration starting from the address.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used as a work by the non-game program, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which the game program saves data, and the non-game RAM area includes a game An area where the program can be referred to, an area where the game program cannot be referred to, and a non-game stack area where the non-game program saves data are included. In the present embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas. However, the game stack area and the non-game program may be provided with a single stack area.

  The unused area 3 is an area in which neither a game program nor a non-game program is used, and is an area that is redundant with respect to a game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

  The unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither a game program nor a non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 4, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-related not related to the progress of the game The non-game RAM area used by the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage areas.

  Hereinafter, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. . Further, the unused area 1 and the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

  Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 permits access in the usable area of the RAM 41c when an access is prohibited in the program / data area of the ROM 41b. When there is an access to an area that is not set to, when there is an access to an area other than the program / data area in the ROM 41b, and when there is an access to an area other than the usable area in the RAM 41c, In other words, when an access is made to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, an illegal access reset is generated to disable the progress of the game. Therefore, an unused area of the ROM 41b or an area unrelated to the operation If an illegal program is stored in an unused area of the RAM 41c, etc. Even, it is possible to prevent illegal program from being executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and before the non-game program area behind the game program area. An unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and a group including an area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While the access to the area (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area) is collectively set to be permitted, the other areas, that is, the program / data area of the game program, game data, non-game program, Non-game data is not stored Because it is forbidden access to the area later than trick data, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Are allocated to a group of areas including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Thus, while the permission is set, even if access to other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data.

  A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area, and a program / data Out of the areas, a group of areas including the game program area (area from the game program area to the game data area), a group of areas including the non-game program (area from the non-game program area to the non-game data area) A configuration may be adopted in which access is set to permit and access to other areas is prohibited. Even in such a configuration, a game program or a non-game program is not stored in the program / data area. Access is prohibited, so the intent of unauthorized programs and unauthorized data Can be prevented without control will take place. In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Of the program / data area including the game program area (the area from the game program area to the game data area), and the area including the non-game program (from the non-game program area to the non-game area). (Access to the data area) may be set to permit, and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, a game program or non-game in the program / data area Access to an area where no program is stored Because There is inhibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  In the above description, the area where access is permitted is set in the program / data area. However, by setting the area where access is prohibited in the program / data area, the area where access is indirectly permitted is set. It is good also as a structure to be performed.

  Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 executes the user program when the user program is executed in an area other than the designated area where the program travel is permitted, that is, in a normal operation. When the user program is executed in an unoccupied area, the IAT circuit 506a outputs an IAT generation signal to disable the progress of the game. Therefore, the unused area of the ROM 41b and the area unrelated to the operation, the unallocated area of the RAM 41c Even if an unauthorized program is stored in the use area or the like, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and before the non-game program area behind the game program area. The unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and the IAT circuit 506a permits the program running for each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While it is set as a designated area, program running in other areas, that is, areas that do not store gaming programs or non-gaming programs in the program / data area is prohibited. Control line It can be prevented been.

  In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area And the IAT circuit 506a sets each of the game program area and the non-game program area of the program / data area as a designated area that permits program running based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Thus, even if the program running in other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control due to unauthorized programs and unauthorized data.

  A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area, and an HW parameter area. Based on the parameters set in the above, a group of areas including the area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area (area from the game program area to the non-game data area) For example, the IAT circuit 506a may be set as a designated area for permitting program running at once and the program running in other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area Of which game programs and non-game programs are stored Since the program running in the absence area is prohibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data. In addition, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area in the program / data area permitted to be accessed by the program in the ROM 41b, and an unused area in the area before the game program area behind the non-game program area Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, a group of areas (from the game program area) including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area. Even if the IAT circuit 506a is collectively set as a designated area for permitting program running and the program running in other areas is prohibited, the area up to the non-game data area) Unintended control It can be prevented been.

  In the above description, the program / data area is configured to set the area that permits the program travel. However, the program / data area allows the program travel to be indirectly permitted by setting the area that prohibits the program travel. A configuration may be adopted in which an area is set.

  The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program, and a subroutine that is called during execution of another program.

  Also, a CALL instruction is included as an instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to execute a program stored in the program / data area.

  The CALL instruction is an instruction for calling and executing a subroutine stored at an address designated in the main routine or the subroutine. When calling the subroutine by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the call source address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the designated address. After the subroutine is finished, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller main routine or subroutine program that executed the CALL instruction is returned.

  The CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. The normal CALL instruction is an instruction that specifies a high-order address and a low-order address to specify both the high-order address and the low-order address and calls a subroutine while the CALLV instruction specifies only the low-order address. As a result, the subroutine is called by specifying the address by the upper address preset in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and the designated lower address, and the subroutine is called with a smaller amount of data than the normal CALL instruction. It becomes possible.

  The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to a specified value by specifying a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses. Subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data than instructions and CALLV instructions. When calling the subroutine by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the caller's address in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the designated value. After the subroutine is finished, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the caller main routine or subroutine that executed the RST instruction is returned to.

  The jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in the main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction or the RST instruction, even if the program after the movement ends, the program does not return to the movement source program.

  The main control unit 41 includes an LD command as a command for reading data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction for reading data stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine into a specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

  Among the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are particularly frequently used are stored in an area of the game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, a specific value is set in the vector table area of the ROM 41b as an upper address of a subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. The main control unit 41 specifies only the lower address using the CALLV instruction when calling a subroutine in which the upper address of the head address has a specific value, thereby specifying the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. The lower address specified as the lower address is specified, and the subroutine stored in the address including the upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, an upper address that constitutes a part of an address used when calling a subroutine that is used frequently in the game program is set in the vector table in advance as a specific value, and is based on the specific value set in the vector table. Since the address is specified, it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both an upper address and a lower address, and when calling these subroutines It is possible to reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address.

  Of the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are used frequently are stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 41b in the area where the start address is a specific value, and the CALLV instruction is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. When a specific value is set as an upper address of a subroutine to be called at the time, and the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the top address is a specific value, only the lower address is specified by using the CALLV instruction. Even if it is configured to call and execute, subroutines can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both upper and lower addresses. When calling It is possible to reduce the waste of program for specifying the address.

  In addition, the upper address used when calling with the CALLV instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

  In addition to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using a value stored in the vector table area, a value set in a specific register, etc. If a special CALL instruction that enables the storage address to be specified is used, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for designating an address when calling a subroutine. In addition, identification values having a data amount smaller than the addresses are assigned to the plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, the storage addresses of the subroutines are set in the plurality of areas, and the identification values are designated, thereby identifying the areas. Even in a configuration that uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify a storage address of a subroutine stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for designating an address when the subroutine is called. .

  In addition, among the game data stored in the ROM 41b, game data that is frequently used is stored in the game data area of the ROM 41b in an area where the head address is a specific value, and a special LD is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the data to be read by the instruction, and when the main control unit 41 calls game data in which the upper address of the top address becomes the specific value, only the lower address is specified by using a special LD instruction. Even when it is configured to read out these game data, it becomes possible to call game data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD command that reads out data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. When wasting game data, the program for specifying the address is wasted It can be reduced.

  In addition, among the non-game data stored in the ROM 41b, non-game data that is frequently used is stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b in the area where the head address is a specific value, and in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, When a specific value is set as an upper address of data read by a special LD instruction and the main control unit 41 calls non-game data whose upper address of the head address is a specific value, only the lower address is used by using a special LD instruction. Even if it is configured to read these non-game data by designating, the non-game data is called with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction that designates both the upper address and the lower address and reads data. It is possible to specify the address when reading these non-game data. It is possible to reduce the waste of lamb.

  Also in these cases, the higher address used when calling with a special LD instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41, not in the vector table area.

  Also, a part of the address is specified using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in a specific register, etc., and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address If the configuration uses a special LD instruction, the waste of a program for designating an address when reading data can be reduced. In addition, identification values with a data amount smaller than the addresses are assigned to the plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, the data storage addresses are set in the plurality of areas, and the identification values are designated to identify the areas. Even in a configuration using a special LD instruction that can specify the storage address of data stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data .

  The main control unit 41 is activated when a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by the WDT 506b, or the aforementioned illegal access reset occurs. At this time, the value set in the vector table area, that is, The upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) are values indicating the area where the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (in the unused vector table area) If the value set in the vector table area is neither a value outside the area where the program is set nor FFFFH, it will not start. That unintended processing is executed due to an interrupt. It can be prevented before.

  The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless the process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, a non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and even when the game program is called to return to the game program without executing processing based on the program, the game can be advanced. It is a program for executing processing.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the game program includes a game dedicated program included only in the game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program included in both the game program and the non-game program.

  The game dedicated program includes, for example, a game start waiting process, an internal lottery process, a reel control process, a game end setting process, an external output 1 process, an initial setting process, a power interruption process, and an error process. In the game start waiting process, after the control of one game is completed, the bet number is set by inserting medals, etc., and after the prescribed number of bets is set, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The internal lottery process is a process of performing an internal lottery and setting a winning flag, etc., and the reel control process starts the rotation of the reels, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. In the game end setting process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred according to the stop position of the stopped reel, and medals are paid out, re-game is set, and the game state is set. The external output 1 process is a process for performing output control of the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the RT signal among the external output signals. First The setting process is a process for making the game possible when the power is turned on (confirm backup error, register initialization, etc.), and the power interruption process can return to the state before the power interruption after the power interruption occurs. The error processing includes various abnormalities (medal insertion abnormality, foreign object detection in the medal selector 29, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign object detection near the payout outlet, RAM abnormality, setting, etc. This is a process for disabling the game when a value abnormality, empty hopper tank 34a, full tank overflow tank 35, etc. are detected. In addition, although not particularly illustrated, the game program includes processing related to the above-described AT (a lottery related to AT, control related to navigation notification, and the like).

  The common determination program in the game program includes, for example, an input determination process and a payout determination process. The insertion determination process is a process for determining whether or not the medal is normally passed by the inserted medal sensor 31, and is a process executed in a state where a medal can be inserted for setting a bet amount. The payout determination process is a process for determining whether or not the medal is normally passed by the payout sensor 34c, and is a process executed in a state where the payout of the medal is permitted at the time of winning a small role or at the time of credit settlement It is.

  The common general-purpose program in the game program is a process that is called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the game program. For example, a counter update process, a port input process, a data conversion process, an LED display process, a data setting process, Includes command setting processing. The counter update process is a process for updating the designated counter value, the port input process is a process for acquiring the input state of the designated port, and the data conversion process is input using game data. Is a process for converting and outputting the data, the LED display process is a process for setting the specified value to be displayed on the LED, and the data setting process is a process for setting the specified data, The command setting process is a process for setting a specified command in the command queue.

  In particular, the game program, when an abnormality is detected as described above, the release condition corresponding to the type of abnormality (in the case of random number abnormality, RAM abnormality, backup abnormality, setting value abnormality, resetting of the setting value, In the case of an abnormality other than the above, error processing is included that disables the progress of the game until a reset operation is established.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the non-game program includes a non-game dedicated program included only in the non-game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program that are the same as the game program.

  Non-game dedicated programs include, for example, test signal output processing, foreign object detection processing, door monitoring processing, external output 2 processing, inserted medal error determination processing, payout medal error determination processing, power failure determination processing, normal time command transmission processing, power interruption Includes time command transmission processing and gaming machine information display processing. The test signal output process is a process for outputting a test signal generated in relation to the game result, and the foreign object detection process is a process for detecting a foreign object in the medal path by the insertion port sensor 26. The door monitoring process is a process for detecting the opening of the front door 1b, and the external output 2 process is a security signal (door open signal, setting change signal, input error signal, payout error signal) among external output signals. The inserted medal error determination process is a process for performing output control. Based on the detection status of the inserted medal sensor 31, the inserted medal backflow detection, the medal clogging detection in the medal selector 29, and the foreign object detection in the medal selector 29 are performed. The payout medal error determination process is based on the detection status of the payout sensor 34c, and the medal detection near the payout exit The power failure determination process is a process for determining whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected, and is a normal time command. The transmission process is a process for transmitting one command set first in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91 among the commands set in the command queue by the command setting process of the game dedicated program and the non-game dedicated program. The power interruption command transmission process is a process for transmitting all the commands set in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91, and the gaming machine information display process is a slot such as an advantageous section ratio described later. Processing for calculating and calculating information related to the machine 1 and displaying information based on the calculation result on the gaming machine information display 50 mounted on the gaming control board 40 A.

  The common general-purpose program in the non-game program is a process that is called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the non-game program.For example, the counter update process, the port input process, Includes data conversion processing, LED display processing, data setting processing, and command setting processing.

  The non-game program includes processing for determining whether or not a predetermined detection status is based on the detection status of detection means (the slot sensor 26, the full sensor 35a, and the door opening detection switch 25) that are not involved in the progress of the game.

  In addition, the non-game program functions as a detection means related to the progress of a game in a specific control state among a plurality of control states (game start waiting process, internal lottery process, reel control process, game end time setting process). In other control states, the detection means (for example, the inserted medal sensor 31 and the payout sensor 34c) functioning as detection means not related to the progress of the game is based on the detection state in the control state not related to the progress of the game. A process for determining whether or not a predetermined detection status is present (for example, a inserted medal detection process or a payout medal detection process for detecting an abnormality caused by detecting the insertion of a medal during reel rotation or the payout of a medal) Including. Such a determination process corresponds to the common determination program because it is the same process as the process for determining whether or not the game program is in a predetermined detection status based on the detection status in the control state related to the progress of the game. .

  Of the processes included in the game program, the external output 1 process, the process of counting the number of medals inserted in the game start waiting process, the process of switching the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the number of medals paid out in the game end setting process Processing that does not directly relate to the progress of the game, such as counting, processing for detecting that the hopper tank 34a is empty, processing for updating software random numbers, processing related to AT, transmission processing for internal winning commands, etc. If so, a configuration in which all or part of these processes are included in the non-game program may be employed. On the other hand, as long as the processes included in the non-game program are indirectly related to the progress of the game, all or a part of these processes may be included in the game program.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls a non-game program in the process based on the game program, executes the process based on the non-game program, and ends the process based on the non-game program. Return to the processing based on the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a, in principle, executes the process based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area and uses the game RAM area as a work when executing the process based on the game program. The contents of the game RAM area can be referred to and updated. Further, the CPU 41a, in principle, executes processing based on the non-game program by referring to the game data in the non-game data area, and uses the non-game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-game RAM area.

  Further, the CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing processing based on the game program, but can refer to the non-game RAM area. In executing the processing based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

  In addition, the process based on the game program can be referred to only a specific area necessary for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection). In the processing based on the game RAM area, only specific areas required for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) can be referred to. In addition, a specific area in the non-game RAM area where the process based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the game RAM area where the process based on the non-game program can be referred to may be assigned to a continuous address area. However, a configuration in which part or all of the address areas are allocated to non-contiguous address areas may be used.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a game data area in which game data referred to by the game program is readable and stored, and work data referred to by the game program Is a game RAM area that is stored so as to be readable and writable, a program that is called by the game program, a non-game program area that stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game that is referenced by the non-game program Since a non-game data area in which data is stored in a readable manner and a non-game RAM area in which work data referred to by the non-game program are stored in a readable and writable manner are separately allocated, a game program, Game data and work program work data; Game program, the workpiece data of the non game data and non-game program, can be easily identified according to a difference in the storage area.

  In addition, by dividing the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied by the ROM 41b can be managed in a compact manner according to each function. It becomes easier to specify the corresponding data.

  Further, in this embodiment, when executing the game program, it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area, and when executing the non-game program, it is possible to refer to the game RAM area. In executing the game program, the data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and in executing the non-game program, the data used by the game program can be used easily. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. Does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

  Further, in this embodiment, the processing based on the game program can be referred to only a specific area required for the game program in the non-game RAM area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection). The processing based on the non-gaming program can be referred to only specific areas (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-gaming program in the gaming RAM area. Therefore, since the data that can be referred to by the game program in the non-game RAM area and the data that can be referred to by the non-game program are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can call a non-game program from the process based on the game program during the execution of the main process. As shown, it is possible to call a non-game program from a process based on the game program during the execution of the timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), when calling a non-game program from a main process based on a game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area, and performs a common call process. 1 is executed. The common call process 1 is a process included in the game program. In the common call process 1, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area and the stack pointer (SP, an address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is stored. Is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and the timer master permission flag is set to a value indicating that the interrupt is prohibited by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag, and then set to a specific area. Call the non-game program at the address.

  On the other hand, based on the called non-game program, the stack pointer (non-SP, address indicating the current position of the non-game stack area) of the non-game program is set and the process of the non-game program is executed. Thereafter, the game program of the caller, that is, the common call process 1 is restored.

  After returning to the common call process 1, the common call process 1 releases the prohibition of the timer interrupt by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating the permission of the interrupt, and saves the game stack area and the SP. Based on the data saved in the area, the register and the stack pointer of the game program are returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the process ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game program calls the non-game program, the interrupt is prohibited by the common call processing 1 and when returning from the non-game program to the game program, Since the prohibition is released, it is possible to set the interrupt to be prohibited over a period during which the non-game program is being executed.

  In addition, when a non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the non-game program first disables interrupts and then executes various processes. The configuration may be such that the prohibition of the interrupt is canceled, and by adopting such a configuration, the interrupt can be set to be prohibited during the period during which the non-game program is executed, as in the present embodiment. In addition, since the prohibition and cancellation of interrupts are set by a non-game program, it is not necessary to set and cancel the prohibition of interrupts in the common call processing 1 of the game program, and the capacity of the game program can be reduced. .

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when a non-game program is called from a timer interrupt process based on a game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area, Call process 2 is executed. In the common call process 2, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then specified. Call the non-game program at the address set in the area.

  On the other hand, the called non-game program sets the stack pointer of the non-game program, executes the process of the non-game program, and then returns to the common call process 2 of the caller.

  After returning to the common call process 2, the common call process 2 returns the register and the stack pointer of the game program to the state before calling the non-game program based on the data saved in the game stack area and the SP save area. Return and exit.

  As described above, in the common call process 2, unlike the call common process 1, the timer interrupt is not set to be prohibited or released. However, as described above, the main control unit 41 performs other interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Since the execution of the interruption process is prohibited, the interruption can be prohibited over the period during which the non-game program is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the game program executes the common call process 1 and the common call process 2 to call the non-game program and execute the non-game program. Regardless of whether or not there is, processing to save and protect all areas of the register is performed, so when returning to the game program, it is possible to reliably return from the state when the non-game program was called .

  In addition, without executing the common call process 1 and the common call process 2, the value of the register used by the game program immediately before calling the non-game program from the process based on the game program in the game program is protected. After all the processing based on the above is completed, the protected register value may be restored at the initial stage of returning to the game program. With such a configuration, the register is called before the non-game program is called. Since the protection process is performed and the register restoration process is performed after the return from the non-game program, the data stored in the register by the non-game program does not affect the game program.

  In addition, when a non-game program is called, the non-game program first saves the stack pointer and register of the game program, and returns the stack pointer and register of the game program to the end of the non-game program. With this configuration, as in this embodiment, when returning to the game program, it is possible to reliably return from the state when the non-game program is called and Capacity can be reduced.

  Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  First, an initial setting process that is executed by the main control unit 41 at startup will be described. When the main control unit 41 is activated due to the occurrence of a reset, the main control unit 41 performs setting at activation. In the startup setting, a status flag included in the main control unit 41 is initialized. The status flag is data that holds the state of the operation result and execution result of the instruction, and particularly includes an interrupt master permission flag for setting interrupt prohibition / permission. Since the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating prohibition of interrupt, the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupt is prohibited. After that, the main control unit 41 sets various functions with reference to the HW parameter, and then performs an initial setting process according to the program stored in the program / data area. In this embodiment, the initial setting process is included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the initial setting process, interrupts are first prohibited by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating that interrupts are prohibited (Sa1). As described above, the main control unit 41 is started in an interrupt-inhibited state, but in Sa1, the interrupt is again prohibited. Next, initialization data is set (Sa2), and each output port including the parallel output port 513 is initialized (Sa3). Next, the built-in register is set (Sa4).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the power supply voltage is normal (Sa5). If the power supply voltage is not normal, the determination is repeated until normal. If the power supply voltage is normal, the upper address of the interrupt vector is set (Sa6). Then, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa7), and the stack pointer is initialized (Sa8).

  Next, the RAM parity of the game RAM area (game stack area, F000H to F1FFH including the unused area 3) in the usable area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa9). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated RAM parity is 0 (Sa10). As will be described later, if the power-off process (main) is normally performed at the time of the previous power-off, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sd10, the game of the RAM 41c The data stored in the RAM area is not normal. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa13 to clear the destruction diagnosis data (Sa13). On the other hand, when the RAM parity becomes 0, the data for destructive diagnosis stored in the game RAM area is further acquired (Sa11), and it is determined whether the acquired data for destructive diagnosis is correct (Sa12), Destructive diagnosis data is cleared (Sa13).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa14). When the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state, a timer interrupt is set (Sa19). Specifically, the register of the timer circuit 509 built in the main control unit 41 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically executed every predetermined time. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to about 0.56 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register), so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every about 0.56 ms. In the timer circuit 509, the register is set, so that the timer is initialized and starts counting from the initial value. When the timer interrupt setting in step Sa19 is completed, the process proceeds to a setting change process.

  On the other hand, when the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state, it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed (Sa15). In step Sa15, it is determined whether a RAM abnormality flag, which will be described later, is set, and whether the storage content of the RAM 41c is destroyed based on the determinations in Sa10 and Sa12. If the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed, a return command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (Sa16). In the case where the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed, it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is not set and the RAM parity is 0 in the step Sa10, and further, the destruction diagnosis data is obtained in the step Sa12. This is the case when it is determined to be correct.

  After the step of Sa16, all the registers are restored based on the data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sa17), and the timer interrupt setting similar to the step of Sa19 is performed (Sa18). Then, the process proceeds to Sd24 in a timer interrupt process (main) described later. As a result, the state of the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c before the power interruption and the processing executed before the power interruption are restored.

  If the stored content of the RAM 41c is destroyed in step Sa15, a RAM abnormality flag indicating that the stored content of the RAM 41c is not normal is set in the RAM 41c (Sa20), and the process proceeds to error processing. In error processing, the progress of the game is disabled. Further, the error state that has been shifted after the RAM abnormality flag is set can be canceled by shifting to the setting change process by setting the setting key switch 37 to ON and turning on the power switch 39. On the other hand, when the power switch 39 is turned on without turning the setting key switch 37 on, the RAM abnormality flag remains set, and it is determined that the RAM is destroyed in step Sa15. An error condition occurs again.

  Next, the setting change process which the main control part 41 performs is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, the setting change process is included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 41 first sets the start address of the RAM 41c, that is, the start address (F000H) of the usable area in the register (Sb1). Next, it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the same manner as the step Sa15 shown in FIG. 11 (Sb2). If the contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed, that is, if the contents of the RAM are not abnormal, the initial address of the initialization target RAM at the start of the setting change (the last address of the area where important work is stored among the usable areas) Next address) is set in the register (Sb3). That is, the address set in Sb1 is changed. If the contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, that is, if the contents of the RAM are abnormal, the process proceeds to step Sb4.

  Next, the final address (F1FFH) of the game stack area (in use) is designated as the final address of the initialization target RAM (Sb4), the game area initialization process is executed, and the address specified in the Sb1 or Sb3 step is used. The area up to the final address of the initialization target RAM is initialized (Sb5). Since the start address (F000H) of the usable area is set in the step Sb1, if the RAM contents are abnormal, all the game RAM areas in the RAM 41c are initialized in the step Sb5. It becomes. On the other hand, in the step of Sb3, the next address after the last address of the area in which the special work is stored among the usable areas is set as the initial address of the initialization target RAM at the start of setting change. If not abnormal, an area other than the special work in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is initialized in step Sb5.

  Thereafter, a non-game area initialization process, which will be described later, is executed to initialize the areas from the top address of the unused area 4 to the last address of the non-game stack area (in use), that is, the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area. (Sb6).

  Next, a setting command (start) indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (Sb7), and interrupts are permitted (Sb8).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 has changed from OFF to ON (Sb9). When the reset / setting switch 38 changes from OFF to ON, the set value of the register is updated (1 is added in the case of 1 to 5, and 1 is updated in the case of 6) (Sb10). If the reset / setting switch 38 has not changed, it is determined whether or not the start switch 7 has changed from OFF to ON (Sb11). If the start switch 7 has not changed, the process returns to step Sb7. On the other hand, when the start switch 7 changes from OFF to ON, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is OFF (Sb12). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the OFF state, it waits until the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state. When the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state, the setting value data set in the register is stored in the special work of the RAM 41c (Sb13).

  Next, a setting command (end) indicating the end of the setting change state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (Sb14). Then, the initial address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the setting change (the address next to the last address of the usable area in which the special work is stored) is set in the register (Sb14), and the process proceeds to the main process. .

  Next, a game area initialization process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the present embodiment, the game area initialization process is included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 41 obtains the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM set in the register (Sf1). Then, the initial address value is subtracted from the end address value of the initialization target RAM to calculate the capacity of the initialization target RAM (Sf2), and the calculated capacity of the initialization target RAM is set in the register (Sf3). Also, the initial address value of the initialization target RAM is set as a designated address (Sf4), and 1-byte data stored in the designated address is overwritten with 0 and cleared (Sf5). Thereafter, the logical sum of the 1-byte data is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0 (Sf6). If the calculation result is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sf5 and again the 1-byte data. Overwrite with 0 to clear. If it is determined in step Sf6 that the calculation result is 0, the designated address is updated to the address next to the currently set address as the designated address (Sf7), and the register is decremented by 1. (Sf8), it is determined whether or not the register is 0 (Sf9).

  If it is determined in step Sf9 that the register is not 0, the process returns to step Sf5, and the processes in steps Sf5 to Sf9 are repeated until the register becomes 0. If it is determined in step Sf9 that the register is 0, the game area initialization process is terminated and the process returns to the calling program.

  As described above, in the game area initialization process according to the present embodiment, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated by designating the start address and the end address of the initialization target RAM, and the start address of the initialization target RAM is calculated. From the game RAM area, the designated initialization target RAM area is initialized by sequentially clearing the area for the capacity of the initialization target RAM.

  In the game area initialization process of the present embodiment, by specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated based on the start address and end address, and the start The process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data at the specified address, with the address as the initial value of the specified address, is repeatedly executed for the capacity of the RAM to be initialized. The area from the address to the end address is initialized. By specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the start address becomes the initial value of the specified address, and the data of the specified address is changed. The process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the By repeatedly executed until the may be configured to area from the start address to be initialized RAM to the end address is initialized.

  Next, the non-game area initialization process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the present embodiment, the non-game area initialization process is included in the non-game program.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the main control unit 41 sets the start address of the unused area 4 as the start address of the initialization target RAM (Sg1). Then, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated by subtracting the start address value of the initialization target RAM (the start address value of the unused area 4) from the final address value of the usable area of the RAM 41c (Sg2). The capacity of the initialization target RAM is set in the register (Sg3). Also, the initial address value of the initialization target RAM (the initial address value of the unused area 4) is set as the designated address (Sg4), and the 1-byte data stored in the designated address is overwritten with 0 and cleared. (Sg5). Thereafter, the logical sum of the 1-byte data is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0 (Sf6). If the calculation result is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sg5 and again the 1-byte data. Overwrite with 0 to clear. If it is determined in step Sg6 that the calculation result is 0, the designated address is updated to the address next to the currently set address as the designated address (Sg7), and the register is decremented by 1. (Sg8), it is determined whether or not the register is 0 (Sg9).

  If it is determined in step Sg9 that the register is not 0, the process returns to step Sg5, and the processing in steps Sg5 to Sg9 is repeated until the register becomes 0. If it is determined in step Sg9 that the register is 0, the non-game area initialization process is terminated and the process returns to the calling program.

  Thus, in the non-game area initialization process of the present embodiment, by sequentially clearing the RAM area for the capacity of the initialization target RAM from the start address of the initialization target RAM (the start address of the unused area 4), The areas from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM, that is, the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area are initialized.

  In the non-game area initialization process of this embodiment, by specifying the start address of the initialization target RAM, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated based on the start address, and the start address is set to the specified address. The process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data at the specified address as the initial value is repeatedly executed as many times as the capacity of the RAM to be initialized. The area is initialized, but by specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the start address becomes the initial value of the specified address, and the specified address is cleared after clearing the data of the specified address. Is repeatedly executed until the specified address reaches the end address. Area from the start address to be initialized RAM to the end address may be configured to be initialized.

  Further, in the non-game area initialization process of the present embodiment, by setting the start address of the unused area 4 as the start address of the initialization target RAM, all of the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area are initialized. However, the non-game area initialization process only needs to initialize at least a part of the non-game RAM area, and initializes a part of the non-game RAM area. However, a part of the non-game RAM area and the unused area 4 may be initialized.

  In this embodiment, in the game area initialization process and the non-game area initialization process, the 1-byte data stored in the specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared, and then the logic of the 1-byte data is changed. The sum is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0 (Sf6). If the calculation result is not 0, the processing is performed by overwriting the 1-byte data with 0 again and clearing it. The data at the address to be cleared is cleared, but the configuration in which 1-byte data stored at the specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared is also possible.

  Next, main processing executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. The main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. One period of the main process corresponds to one unit of the game. In this embodiment, the main process is included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the main control unit 41 first prohibits an interrupt (Sc1). Next, the final address of the initialization target RAM (the final address of the game stack area (unused)) is set (Sc2).

  Next, a game area initialization process is executed to clear the area of the RAM 41c indicated by the designated address (Sc3). At this time, if the main process is started after the setting change process, the special work among the usable areas is stored as the start address of the initialization target RAM when the setting change process is ended. Since the final address of the game stack area (unused) is set as the final address of the initialization target RAM in Sc2 of the main process, the final address of the game RAM area is set. In addition, areas other than the game stack area (in use) (important work, general work, unused area 3, and stack area (unused)) are initialized. At the end of a game that is not in a specific gaming state, the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the game (the start address of the unused area 3) is set in the step of Sc10 described later, and the initialization is performed in the step of Sc2. Since the final address of the target RAM (the final address of the game stack area (unused)) is set, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) among the available areas are initialized. Also, at the end of the specific gaming state and at the end of the game, the initial address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the specific gaming state (a special work in the gaming RAM area is stored at the step of Sc11 described later). In the step of Sc2, the final address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the specific gaming state (final address of the gaming stack area (unused)) is set. Therefore, in the game RAM area, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) are initialized.

  After initialization of RAM in the step of Sc3, interruption is permitted (Sc4), and a game start waiting process is executed (Sc5). In the game start waiting process, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process for starting a game is executed when a specified number of bets are set according to the game state and the start switch 7 is operated.

  Next, an internal lottery process is executed (Sc6). In the internal lottery process, whether or not to win the above-mentioned winning combination based on the internal lottery random value latched simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step of Sc5 (that is, the display result is derived). The process of determining whether or not to allow) is performed.

  Next, a reel control process is executed (Sc7). In the reel control process, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the start switch 7, the result of the internal lottery in the step of Sd2, and the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player are detected. In response to this, processing for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is executed.

  Next, a game end time setting process is executed (Sc8). In the game end setting process, when it is determined that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped in the process of Sc7, a winning occurs according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. The process which determines whether or not is executed. When it is determined that a winning has occurred, processing such as credit addition and medal payout is performed based on the number of payouts according to the winning. When a winning occurs, a process for setting a gaming state for the next game is executed after the medal payout is completed. Further, when no winning occurs, after the reels are stopped, processing for setting a gaming state for the next game is executed.

  When the setting process at the end of the game is completed, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the specific gaming state (Sc9). If it is not the end of the specific gaming state, the initial address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the game is determined. Set (Sc10) and return to the step of Sc1. If it is at the end of the specific gaming state, the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the specific gaming state is set (Sc11), and the process returns to the step of Sc1.

  Also, in the main process, a command storing process for generating a command according to the progress of the game and setting the command in the command queue is executed, and the set command is executed in the normal timer execution process (main) thereafter. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by command transmission processing.

  FIGS. 16 and 17 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 by interrupting and executing the main process (mainly the main process) at regular intervals (approximately 0.56 ms). is there. The timer interrupt process (main) is a process executed by an interrupt generated according to the count of the timer circuit 509. The address at which the program of the timer interrupt process (main) is stored is a vector table. It is set as a value corresponding to the timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, processing from that address is executed. Further, other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (main). In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is included in the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the timer interrupt process (main), first, the register in use is saved in the game stack area (Sd1).

  Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Sd2). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48. If a voltage drop signal is input, whether or not the voltage drop signal is input in the previous power failure determination process as well. If a voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power interruption flag indicating that is set.

  After the power failure determination process in step Sd2, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set (Sd3). If the power interruption flag is not set, the process proceeds to Sd4, and detection data of various switches from the input port. The port input process to input is performed. On the other hand, if the power interruption flag is set in the step of Sd3, the command transmission process at the time of power interruption is executed, so that all the untransmitted commands set in the command queue are transferred to the sub-control unit 91. After the transmission (Sd25), the process proceeds to a power interruption process (main).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sd5). In step Sd5, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sd6). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, motor phase signal output processing for outputting the phase signal data of the reel motors 32C, 32C, 32R is executed (Sd7).

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether or not it is 1, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sd8). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, the reel motor Reel start processing (Sd9) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sd10) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, motor phase signal standby processing (Sd11) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a lapse of a certain time is sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sd24.

  If it is determined in step Sd8 that the timer interrupt is 2, normal command transmission processing (Sd12) for transmitting various commands set in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91, the door opening detection switch 25 Door monitoring processing (Sd13) for performing detection status monitoring, door command transmission request, etc., external output signal updating processing (Sd14) for updating external output signals, LED dynamic display processing (Sd15) for dynamically lighting various displays, After sequentially executing control signal output processing (Sd16) for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port and time counter update processing (Sd17) for updating various time counters, the process proceeds to step Sd24.

  If it is determined in step Sd6 that timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 is detected, it is further determined whether or not the branch counter value is 3, that is, timer interrupt 4 (Sd18). If it is not the timer interrupt 4, that is, the timer interrupt 3, the origin passing process (Sd19) for checking the origin passing (passing of the reel reference position) of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R, After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sd20) for determining whether or not the detection state has changed, the process proceeds to step Sd24.

  If it is determined in step Sd18 that the timer interrupt is 4, stop switch processing (Sd21) for determining a stop position in accordance with detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, two phases when it is time to stop. A stop process (Sd22) for starting braking by excitation and a final stop process (Sd23) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of braking in the stop process are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sd24.

  In step Sd24, the register saved in the game stack area in Sd1 is restored, and the process before the interruption is returned.

  In this embodiment, the timer interruption process (main) is included in the game program, while the power failure determination process, the power interruption command transmission process, the normal time command transmission process, and the door opening monitoring process are included in the non-game program. As described above, the main control unit 41 sets interrupt prohibition in the timer interrupt process (main), saves the stack pointer and registers of the game program, and then calls these non-game programs. It is like that. Also, when returning from these non-game programs to timer interrupt processing (main), the stack pointer and registers of the game program are returned to the state before the call of the non-game program, and the subsequent processing is performed. It is supposed to run. Since the main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt process, the subsequent process is executed in the interrupt disabled state even after returning from the non-game program. To do.

  In addition, the power failure determination process, the power interruption command transmission process, the normal time command transmission process, and the door opening monitoring process, which are non-game programs executed in the timer interrupt process (main), must be executed before these non-game programs. Processing that excludes certain processes (for example, port input processing and motor phase signal output processing that need to be executed before the branch of the timer interrupt), that is, control effects that are performed before or after the non-game program It is designed to be executed before processing without any error.

  Next, the power interruption process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described.

  FIG. 18 illustrates the power interruption process (main) executed after the power interruption command transmission process when the main control unit 41 determines that the power interruption flag is set in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. It is a flowchart which shows the control content. In the present embodiment, the power interruption process is included in the game program.

  In the power interruption process (main), the main control unit 41 first saves all the registers that may be used in the stack area (Se1).

  Next, all output ports including the parallel output port 513 that outputs a command are initialized (Se2). As a result, the output state of the output port corresponding to the last command output by the power interruption command transmission process is initialized. Then, the destruction diagnosis data is set in the game RAM area (Se2). Destructive diagnosis data is 5A (H), that is, a value including 1 in any bit. Next, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set in the game RAM area so that the exclusive OR of all areas of the game RAM area (including the unused area 3) becomes 0, and all the game stack areas The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set in the game RAM area so that the exclusive OR of the areas (unused area 3, game stack area (unused) and game stack area (in use)) becomes 0 ( Se4), prohibiting access to the RAM 41c (Se5). Thereafter, the voltage decreases, and the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 stops and shifts to a standby state. Then, as the voltage decreases while in this standby state, the main control unit 41 is internally in an operation stop state and reliably stops operation in the event of a power interruption.

  In this embodiment, the adjustment data is set in the target area so that the calculation result of the target area in the power interruption process becomes a specific value (0 in this embodiment), and the target data is set in the start process. Whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal is determined based on whether or not the calculation result of the area to be a specific value. The calculation result of the area to be processed in the power interruption process and the area to be processed in the start-up process It may be configured to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal depending on whether or not the result of the calculation matches. The calculation method is not limited to exclusive OR, and other calculation methods (for example, summation) may be used.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data 1 is calculated using the data stored in all areas of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the power interruption process, and the unused area 3 is determined in the startup process. Whether or not the RAM 41c is normal is determined based on the RAM parity calculated using the data stored in all of the game RAM areas including it, and an invalid program is stored in the unused area 3. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized program from being stored in the unused area 3.

  In this embodiment, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated using data stored in all areas of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the power interruption process, and the unused area 3 is included in the activation process. The RAM parity adjustment of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 is configured to determine whether or not the RAM 41c is normal based on the RAM parity calculated using the data stored in all areas of the game RAM area. Data is calculated and set in the game RAM area, and RAM parity adjustment data in the non-game RAM area is calculated and set in the non-game RAM area, and stored in the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the startup process. RAM parity calculated using the calculated data and RAM parity calculated using the data stored in the non-game RAM area RAM41c may be determined configure whether normal or not based. In such a configuration, if an illegal program is stored in the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Therefore, the illegal program is in either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area. Can be prevented from being stored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts in an interrupt-disabled state when a reset occurs, and then interrupts the program at the start of the initial setting process to be executed first. Prohibition is performed, and it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt from occurring even when the main control unit 41 is activated in a state where the interrupt is not prohibited for some reason.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 is configured to permit the interrupt after setting the timer interrupt in the timer circuit 509 after the activation, and the interrupt is generated in a state where the timer interrupt does not operate normally. Can be prevented. In the timer circuit 509, the timer is initialized by setting the timer interrupt, and the timer starts counting from the initial value. After starting, the time until the first interrupt occurs Timer interrupts can be generated at regular time intervals without any deviation from the time until the second and subsequent interrupts are generated. In addition, the main control unit 41 is configured to update the setting of the timer circuit 509 to the initial value by a program in the initial setting process, and when the setting of the timer circuit 509 is rewritten for some reason at the time of activation. Even if it exists, it can prevent that the unintended interruption generate | occur | produces.

  Further, the main control unit 41 proceeds to the setting change process if the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of activation, and initializes the RAM 41c at the start of the setting change process. At this time, if the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the special work is held and other usable areas, that is, the game RAM area excluding the special work, the unused area 3, and the non-game RAM area are initialized. Even after the setting is changed, a part of the control state (setting value, gaming state, etc.) before the change can be held, but if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, all the usable areas are initialized. As a result, the abnormality in the data of the RAM 41c can be surely solved.

  The main control unit 41 sets a RAM abnormality flag when a RAM abnormality is determined. Therefore, the RAM parity is 0 when the power is turned off after the RAM abnormality error occurs and the power is turned on again. Yes, even if it is determined that the destruction diagnosis data is normal, it is possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed based on the RAM abnormality flag.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 performs the main process which processes in steps according to progress of a game for every game unit after completion | finish of a setting change process. In the main process, the RAM 41c is initialized for each game unit, and the RAM 41c is also initialized at the end of the setting change process. Then, after the setting change process is completed, the main process is started from a stage before the process of initializing the RAM 41c in the main process. It is possible to perform initialization of the RAM 41c for each process by common processing.

  Further, when the RAM 41c is initialized, the main control unit 41 prohibits interrupts until the initialization is completed, and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed during the initialization of the RAM 41c. Occurrence can prevent the initialized contents from being changed and the processing performed in the timer interrupt processing (main) from being performed normally.

  Further, the main control unit 41 updates the output state of the external output signal in the main process, and changes the output state of the external output signal in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main) based on the updated output state. In addition, when updating the output state of the external output signal, interrupts are prohibited until the update is completed, and timer interrupt processing (main) occurs before the output state of the external output signal is completed By doing so, it is possible to prevent an external output signal indicating unintended data from being output.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute a main process based on a program and interrupt a main process at a predetermined time interval to execute a timer interrupt process (main) based on a game program. It is also possible to call and execute a non-game program from (main).

  In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may malfunction due to the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) while the non-game program is being executed.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute the main process based on the game program, interrupt the main process at every predetermined time interval, and execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program. In a configuration in which a non-game program can be called and executed from the timer interrupt process (main), when calling a non-game program from the main process, When calling a non-game program from a timer interrupt process (main) while calling a non-game program, In other words, when a non-game program is called in a situation where there is a low possibility that an interrupt will occur, the non-game program is called without setting the interruption of other processes to be prohibited. It is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the prohibition of interruption while preventing malfunction due to execution of interruption.

  The timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is a process by a game program, for example, an LED dynamic display process, a control signal output process, etc., and a process by a non-game program, for example, normal time It consists of a plurality of processes including a command transmission process, a command transmission process at power interruption, etc., and a process by a predetermined game program among a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main) In particular, since a non-game program is called before a process that can be executed before or after these non-game programs, that is, a plurality of processes constituting a timer interrupt process (main) Because the non-game program is called as early as possible, the timer interrupt processing (main) is not terminated for some reason. Even if the Ma interrupt interrupt had occurred doubly generated, it is possible to prevent the other interrupts during execution of a non-game program from being executed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a game program and a non-game program, a game stack area for saving data used by the game program, and a non-game stack area for saving data used by the non-game program Are provided separately, and the main control unit 41 saves the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program in the stack area provided separately. Management becomes easier. In particular, data used by a game program saved due to the occurrence of a timer interrupt and data used by a non-game program executed during execution of timer interrupt processing (main) are mixed and stored in one stack area. As a result, stack management is not complicated.

  When executing the non-game program, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment saves the register values used in the game program in the game stack area, and then calls the non-game program to perform processing in the non-game program. When the processing in the non-game program is completed, the saved register value is restored, so that the register value used by the game program is not changed as the non-game program is executed. it can.

  When calling a non-game program from a process based on the game program, the call common process 1 or the call common process 2 for saving the register value used in the game program to the game stack area is called. By sharing a program for executing a non-game program in processing, the program capacity can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the main process, the call common process 1 is executed, while the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the timer interrupt process. In this case, the call common process 2 different from the call common process 1 is executed to save the register value used in the game program to the game stack area. In the main process, the process based on the game program is performed. The non-game program may be called from the process based on the game program in the timer interruption process, and the common call common process may be executed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to call and execute a non-game program from the main process and from the timer interrupt process (main). When calling, set the interrupt of other processes to be prohibited and call the non-game program, while when calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), disable the interrupt of other processes The main control unit 41 is configured to call a non-game program from the main process, or to call a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). It is good also as a structure which prohibits the interruption of this process.

  Specifically, when calling the non-game program from the process based on the game program during the execution of the main process, the main control unit 41 executes the call common process 1 as in the present embodiment, while the timer interrupt When calling a non-game program from a process based on a game program during the execution of the process, as shown in FIG. 23, in the game program, the start address of the non-game program to be called is set in a register, and the call common process 3 is executed. Similar to the call common process 1, the call common process 3 is a process included in the game program. In the call common process 3, the register of the game program is saved in the game RAM area and the stack pointer (SP, game stack area) is saved. Is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then the timer interrupt is disabled by setting the value of the interrupt master enable flag to a value indicating interrupt prohibition, Thereafter, the non-game program at the address set in the register is called.

  On the other hand, the called non-game program sets the stack pointer (non-SP, address indicating the current position of the non-game stack area) of the non-game program and executes the processing of the non-game program. Returning to the calling game program, that is, the call common processing 3. After returning to the call common process 3, the call common process 3, like the call common process 2, is based on the data saved in the game RAM area, and registers the stack pointer of the register and the game program, and the non-game program. Return to the state before calling and exit. That is, in the call common process 3, the interrupt prohibition is maintained even after the non-game program ends without setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag after the non-game program process ends.

  In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruption of other processes not only when calling a non-game program from the main process but also when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to interruption being executed during execution of the non-game program.

  In particular, when the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the interrupt prohibition is set, and when the timer interrupt process (main) ends, the interrupt prohibition is canceled, so that the timer interrupt process (main) Interruption of other processes will be prohibited during execution, but even in this case, when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts of other processes are prohibited again. Even when the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled due to the cause, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the interrupt being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

  In addition, when executing timer interrupt processing (main) as described above, interrupt prohibition is set, and when the timer interrupt processing (main) ends, timer prohibition is canceled, so timer interrupt processing In the configuration where interrupts of other processes are prohibited during execution of (main), but when interrupts of other processes are prohibited again when a non-game program is called from the timer interrupt process (main) By maintaining the setting of prohibition of interrupts of other processes set at the time of calling the non-game program even after the non-game program ends, the non-game is executed even while the timer interrupt process (main) is being executed. It is possible to prevent the prohibition of interrupts from being canceled by executing the program.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment initializes the game RAM area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed at the start of the setting change process. That is, initialization 0 for initializing all areas of the usable area is performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed at the start of the setting change process, the game RAM area except the special work area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area are initialized. That is, initialization 1 for initializing an area other than the special work in the usable area is performed.

  At the end of the setting change process, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized, that is, the special work and the game stack area in the game RAM area. Initialization 2 is performed to initialize areas other than (in use).

  Also, at the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, initialization 3 is performed to initialize the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area.

  Also, at the end of one game, not at the end of a specific game state, initialization 4 is performed to initialize the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs initialization 0 to 4 when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and among the usable areas of the RAM 41c when the first condition is satisfied as the predetermined condition. When at least a part of the game RAM area in which data used by the game program is stored is initialized and the second condition is established as a predetermined condition, at least a part of the game RAM area and the usable area of the RAM 41c At least a part of the non-game RAM area used by the non-game program is initialized.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, as a first condition, at the end of one game, an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused) that are part of the game RAM area among the available areas. Is initialized, but the non-game RAM area of the usable area is not initialized. In addition, as a first condition, at the end of a specific gaming state, a general work, an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused) that are part of the gaming RAM area among the available areas are initialized. Of the possible areas, the non-game RAM area is not initialized. Also, as the first condition, after the setting change state is finished, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) that are a part of the game RAM area among the available areas are initialized. However, the non-game RAM area in the usable area is not initialized.

  On the other hand, as a second condition, when there is no abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3 that is a part of the game RAM area among the usable areas, The game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (used) are initialized, and all the non-game RAM areas are initialized. If the RAM is abnormal when the setting change state is started, all the game RAM areas in the usable area are initialized and all the game RAM areas are initialized.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of executing a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. A ROM 41d for storing programs is provided.

  In such a configuration, when a game program and a non-game program are mixed in one ROM 41d, it is difficult to determine which program is a program related to the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ROM 41d includes a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored. Since the areas are assigned separately, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is used as a game program work, and stores a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a non-game program work and stores data used by the non-game program. The RAM 41c includes a non-game RAM area, and since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are separately allocated in the RAM 41c, the data used by the game program and the non-game program are used. The main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied, and can specify the data. When the initialization condition 2 is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area is initialized and To initialize at least a portion of the non-gaming RAM area, it is possible to initialize the appropriate data in accordance with the status of the data used by data and non-game programs used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are part of the game RAM area, when the first game is completed as a first initialization condition. As a first initialization condition, when a special game state (BB) is finished and when one game is finished, a general work that is a part of the game RAM area, an unused area 3 and a game stack When the area (unused) is initialized and the setting change is completed and the main process is started as the first initialization condition, the important work and general work areas that are part of the game RAM area are not used. Since the use area 3 and the game stack area (unused) are initialized, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

  In addition, as a second initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change, important work, general work, unused area that are part of the game RAM area 3. A game stack area (unused) and a game stack area (in use) are initialized, and among the non-game RAM areas, an area that is referenced from a game program, an area that is not referenced from a game program, and a non-game stack area ( Unused) and non-game stack areas (in use), that is, all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized, and when there is an abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change as a second initialization condition, Among them, special work, important work, general work, unused area 3, game stack area (unused) and game stack area (in use), that is, game R In addition to initializing all areas of the M area, of the non-game RAM area, an area that is referenced from the game program, an area that is not referenced from the game program, a non-game stack area (unused), and a non-game stack area (in use) ) In other words, in order to initialize all areas of the non-game RAM area, data appropriate for the situation is initialized among data used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c and data used by the non-game program. can do.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied. What is necessary is just to initialize at least a part of the game RAM area when the initialization condition is satisfied, and it is also possible to initialize all areas of the game RAM area.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area and initialize all areas of the non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. However, the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied, and initializes at least a part of the non-game RAM area. It is sufficient that all areas of the game RAM area are initialized, all areas of the non-game RAM area may be initialized, or at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized. It is also possible to initialize all areas of the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured as a program that initializes the game RAM area and a program that initializes the non-game RAM area as separate programs, so that the game program is stored in the non-game RAM area. Since it is not necessary to initialize, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. Further, the program for initializing the game RAM area can be shared both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Furthermore, since a program for initializing the game RAM area is provided as a game program, and a program for initializing the non-game RAM area is provided as a non-game program, the game program initializes the non-game RAM area, It is possible to prevent the game program from affecting the non-game program and the non-game program from affecting the game program without initializing the area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the game end time process setting in the main process as the first initialization condition, and determines that it is not the end of the specific game state, that is, one game is ended. When the game ends, the start address of the initialization target RAM is set, and a predetermined area of the game RAM area is initialized by executing the game area initialization process, so that the game progresses for each game unit. A part of the unnecessary game RAM area can be initialized.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is activated when the setting key switch 37 is ON and starts the setting change process, that is, the second initialization condition is established based on the setting change operation being performed. The game area initialization process is executed to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization process is executed to initialize the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. Thus, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area can be initialized based on a game store clerk setting change operation (initialization operation).

  The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of this embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on a game program or when performing control based on a non-game program, and the first initialization condition Since the unused area 3 is initialized both when and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area 3.

  In this embodiment, the unused area 3 is initialized both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, but at least when the first initialization condition is satisfied. If the configuration is such that the unused area 3 is initialized when either one of the conditions when the second initialization condition is satisfied, illegal data can be prevented from being stored in the unused area 3. If the first initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions, invalid data is stored in the unused area 3 if the unused area 3 is initialized when at least one of the conditions is satisfied. Can be prevented. The same applies even if the second initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is used as a game program work, a game RAM area that stores data used by the game program, and a non-game program work that is used as a non-game program work. A RAM 41c including a game RAM area, and the RAM 41c is configured to retain data stored in the RAM 41c for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped by a backup power source. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 starts, the control unit 41 starts an initial setting process, and whether or not the storage content of the RAM is normal based on the data stored in the RAM 41c held by the backup power source. The data stored in the RAM 41c is determined to be normal. Based resume control.

  In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, whether the storage contents of the RAM are normal based on the data stored in both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. When this is determined, the load when the control is resumed based on the data stored in the RAM 41c becomes excessive.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment starts the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and the RAM in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c held by the backup power source. It is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the parity and the destructive diagnosis data stored in the game RAM area, and if it is determined to be normal, the data stored in the game RAM area and the non-game Control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM area, and whether or not the non-game data stored in the non-game RAM area and that does not interfere with the game progress is normal. By omitting the determination, it is possible to reduce the load at the time of resuming the control while ensuring that the game can proceed normally.

  The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of this embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on a game program or when performing control based on a non-game program. The unit 41 executes an initial setting process when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, calculates a RAM parity of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the initial setting process, and calculates the calculated RAM Since it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the game RAM area are normal based on the parity, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area 3.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes an initial setting process when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and determines whether or not the storage content of the RAM 41c is destroyed in the initial setting process. When it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, the RAM abnormality flag is set to control the error processing, and thereafter the error state is maintained without being automatically restored, while the setting key switch 36 When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started in the state of ON, control is made to the setting change process, the game area initialization process is executed to initialize the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization The process is executed to initialize the non-game RAM area, that is, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error state is canceled. While game any abnormality has occurred in the RAM area and the non gaming RAM area can be prevented from proceeding.

  When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the initial setting process when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 sets a RAM abnormality flag. Then, when the setting key switch 36 is ON, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started and the setting change process is executed. The main control unit 41 is configured to initialize both the RAM area and the non-game RAM area, but when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the initial setting process. When it is determined that the game RAM area is determined, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized and controlled to error processing. In such a configuration, when controlling to error processing, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized, so that either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area is abnormal as in this embodiment. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with the occurrence of In addition, when it is determined that the storage contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized both when the setting change process is executed thereafter. Even with the configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the power interruption process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power interruption detection circuit 48 detects a decrease in the power supply voltage. In the power interruption process, the RAM 41c Access to both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area is prohibited by prohibiting access to the non-game RAM area that is not subject to determination as to whether or not the data is destroyed at the next startup. Thus, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored.

  Next, a timer counter for measuring a time interval used by the main control unit 41 for game progress control and the like will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the timing start condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 sets an initial value corresponding to the timing time as the timer value of the timer counter assigned to the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and in the timer interrupt process (main) The timer value is periodically subtracted, and when the timer value becomes 0, it is specified that the time has elapsed.

  Specifically, when a timing start condition is established in the main process, the main control unit 41 sets an initial value of a timer value corresponding to the timing time in an area to which a timer counter corresponding to the condition is assigned. The set timer value is decremented by 1 until it becomes 0 every 2.24 ms in the time counter update process of the timer interrupt process (main).

  Then, in the main process, as shown in FIG. 20, the address of the corresponding timer counter is acquired (Si1), the acquired value is read (Si2), and it is determined whether the read value is not 0 (Si3). If it is determined that the read value is 0, it is determined that the time has elapsed.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the timer counter used in the present embodiment has an initial value of 1 byte timer A, 1 byte timer B, 1 byte timer C, an initial value exceeding 1 byte, and an initial value exceeding 2 bytes. 2 byte timer A, 2 byte timer B, 2 byte timer C, 2 byte timer D are included.

  The 1-byte timer is a timer for measuring a relatively short period that can be measured with a timer value within 1 byte. For example, an external output signal timer that measures an output period of an external output signal, an LED output update period LED update timer that measures the time, stop invalid timer that measures the period until the stop operation is validated after detection of the stop operation, wait for payout that measures the period until the medal payout starts after the reel stops Timer, insertion detection timer for measuring the period after the insertion medal sensor 31 is detected ON, insertion slot detection timer for measuring the period after the detection of the insertion slot sensor 26 is detected, and ON of the dispensing sensor 34c are detected There are a payout detection timer for measuring a period after being started, a start-up timer for measuring a period from the start of reel rotation until the stop operation becomes effective. Among these, the stop invalid timer, the payout waiting timer, and the start timer do not cross the timing at which one game ends, but the external output signal timer, the LED update timer, the input detection timer, the input port The detection timer and the payout detection timer may straddle the timing at which one game ends with the time measured by these timers.

  The 2-byte timer is a timer for measuring a relatively long period that cannot be measured with a timer value within 1 byte. For example, a 1-game time timer that measures a specified time (about 4.1 seconds) required for 1 game. , A security signal timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal among the external output signals, a standby time timer for measuring a period from the end of the game, and a hopper empty for measuring a period in which the payout sensor 34c is not detected after the hopper motor 34b is driven. There is a timer. Of these, the waiting time timer and the hopper empty timer do not straddle the timing when one game ends, but the one gaming time timer and the security signal timer have one measuring time measured by these timers. There are times when the timing of the end of.

  As described above, the timer counter is a timing at which one game ends, that is, a timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized as the game progresses (a part of the RAM 41c at the end of one game or at the end of a specific gaming state). Including a timer counter that measures a measurement period spanning the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized in accordance with the progress of the game. The counter is also assigned to a special work that is not initialized at the timing according to the progress of the game.

  Among these timer counters, the 1-byte timers A to C are allocated to the consecutive 3 byte areas (804CH to 804EH) of the RAM 41c one byte at a time, and the 2-byte timers A to D are the continuous 8-byte RAM 41c. Two bytes are allocated to the area (804FH to 8055h). Further, the 1-byte timers A to C and the 2-byte timers A to D are also assigned to continuous areas of the RAM 41c. Hereinafter, an area to which the 1-byte timers A to C are allocated is referred to as a 1-byte timer group, and an area to which the 2-byte timers A to D are allocated is referred to as a 2-byte timer group. That is, both the 1-byte timer group and the 2-byte timer group are set in an area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule. The area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule is, for example, an area to which an address added by N (N is a natural number) from the start address and the start address is assigned.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the time counter update process.

  In the time counter update process, first, the number of 1-byte timer counters to be updated (3 in this embodiment) is set as the number of processes for 1 byte (Sj1), and the start address (804CH) of the 1-byte timer group is set. A pointer is set (Sj2).

  Next, if the value of 1 byte stored at the specified address (address indicated by the pointer) is not 0, 1 is subtracted from the value of 1 byte of the specified address (Sj3), and 1 is subtracted from the number of times set in the step of Sj1. (Sj4), it is determined whether the number of processes after subtraction is 0 (Sj5).

  If the number of processes after subtraction is not 0 in step Sj5, that is, if all 1-byte timers have not been updated, 1 is added to the pointer (Sj6), and the process returns to step Sj3. As a result, the pointer moves to the address of the unprocessed 1-byte timer, and if the 1-byte value of the designated address is not 0, the pointer is subtracted.

  When the number of processes after subtraction in step Sj5 is 0, that is, when all the 1-byte timers have been updated, the number of 2-byte timer counters to be updated as the number of 2-byte processes (this embodiment) Then, 4) is set (Sj7), and the pointer is incremented by 1 (Sj8). As a result, the pointer moves to the start address (804FH) of the 2-byte counter group.

  Next, if the 2-byte value stored in the area consisting of the designated address (address indicated by the pointer) and the next address is not 0, the 2-byte value of the designated address and the next address is decremented by 1 (Sj9), and Sj7 1 is subtracted from the number of processes set in step (Sj10), and it is determined whether or not the number of processes after subtraction is 0 (Sj11).

  If the number of processes after the subtraction is not 0 in step Sj11, that is, if all the 2-byte timers have not been updated, the pointer is incremented by 2 (Sj12), and the process returns to step Sj9. As a result, the pointer moves to the address of the unprocessed 2-byte timer, and if the 2-byte value of the designated address and the next address is not 0, the pointer is subtracted.

  If the number of processes after subtraction in step Sj11 is 0, that is, if all the 2-byte timers have been updated, the process ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the timer counter assigned to the RAM 41c is periodically updated to become a specific value (0), thereby specifying the passage of time. Conventionally, when measuring multiple types of time intervals, timer values are set and updated within multiple types of processing that require timekeeping, and each type of program for updating multiple types of timer values is processed. Since it is necessary to provide it inside, it was a factor which increased program capacity. In addition, since a plurality of types of timer counters are allocated as a data group for each process used, it is necessary to read out the values of unrelated addresses in order to collectively update in one process. there were.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, an area in which a plurality of types of timer counter values are stored is set to an area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule in the RAM 41c, and the timer value stored in the designated address is Since multiple types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing the update process while changing the specified address for the area where multiple types of timer counter values are stored by adding a constant to the current specified address Thus, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where each of the processes for designating a plurality of types of addresses and updating the values of the addresses is performed in the individual processes.

  Multiple types of timers can be obtained by repeatedly executing the process of updating the timer value stored at the specified address while changing the specified address for the area where the multiple types of timer counter values are stored by performing a predetermined calculation. Any configuration may be used as long as the value is updated. For example, by adding a constant to the current designated address, multiple types can be obtained by repeatedly executing while changing the designated address for an area in which multiple types of timer counter values are stored. The timer value may be updated, or a value corresponding to the number of processes with respect to the reference address (for example, for a 1-byte counter, +1 for the number of processes 1, +1 for the number of processes 2, and the number of processes While changing the designated address for the area where multiple types of timer counter values are stored by adding or subtracting +3 ...) for 3 Ri may be configured to update a plurality of types of the timer value by return run.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration includes seven types of timer counter values of 1-byte timers A to C and 2-byte timers A to D. However, at least two types of timer counter values are determined according to a predetermined rule of the RAM 41c. In the process of updating the timer value stored in the specified address, the specified address for the area in which multiple types of timer values are stored is changed by performing a predetermined operation. However, if the configuration is such that two or more types of timer values are updated by repeated execution, the program capacity can be reduced as described above.

  In addition, only one of the 1-byte timer and 2-byte timer is set to set the timer counter value in an area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule in the RAM 41c, and update the timer value stored in the designated address. A configuration in which a plurality of types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing a predetermined calculation while changing a designated address for an area in which a plurality of types of timer values are stored may be employed.

  Further, only for some of the timer counters provided in the main control unit 41, a process of setting a timer value in an area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule in the RAM 41c and updating the timer value stored in the designated address, A configuration in which a plurality of types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing a predetermined calculation while changing a designated address for an area in which a plurality of types of timer values are stored may be employed.

  In this embodiment, a separate timer counter is provided for each type of period to be measured. For example, a single timer counter may be shared for a plurality of types of periods in which the measurement periods do not overlap.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the process according to the timer interruption process (main) for periodically performing a predetermined process regardless of the progress of the game and the progress of the game. A main process that performs different processes in stages, and the main control unit 41 sets an initial value to the timer counter when a timing condition is satisfied in the main process, and a plurality of types of timer interrupt processes (main) The timer value is updated, and it is not necessary to provide a process for updating multiple types of timer values in each process constituting the main process, so the program capacity for updating multiple types of timer values is reduced. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed by periodically interrupting the main process. However, in the timer interrupt process periodically performed, it is determined in advance regardless of the progress of the game. The main control unit 41 may be configured to perform both a periodic process for performing the processed process and a main process for performing a process that varies stepwise depending on the progress of the game. By setting an initial value to the timer counter when the timing condition is satisfied in the process and updating multiple types of timer values in the periodic process, multiple types of timer values are set in each process constituting the main process. Since it is not necessary to provide a process for updating, it is possible to reduce a program capacity related to updating of a plurality of types of timer values.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the time counter update process, the value of the address is updated on condition that the value of the designated address is not 0, and the timer value is updated to an abnormal value. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, in the time counter update process, the number of processes equal to the number of timer counters to be updated is set, and the process for updating the timer value is repeatedly executed for the set number of processes. The number of timer counters to be updated can be easily set. For example, when a plurality of types of timer counters having different update intervals are provided, the type of timer value to be updated can be arbitrarily set according to the number of processes to be set. it can.

  Note that the number of processes, that is, the number of timer counters to be updated may be set in a program, or values set in a table may be read and set.

  In addition, the timer counter to be updated last is set in advance without setting the number of processes at the beginning, and the timer value is updated repeatedly until the address of the timer counter is reached. It is also possible to store a specific end value (for example, FFh) at the next address of the timer counter, and to repeatedly execute the process of updating the timer value until the value read from the specified address becomes the specific end value. good.

  In this embodiment, a 1-byte timer counter and a 2-byte timer counter are provided, and a process for updating a 1-byte timer value and a process for updating a 2-byte timer value are separately provided. Therefore, the capacity of the program and the capacity occupied by the timer value in the RAM 41c can be reduced as compared with the case where the process of updating the 1-byte timer value and the process of updating the 2-byte timer value are made common.

  In this embodiment, a relatively long time corresponding to an initial value exceeding 1 byte is measured by providing a 2-byte timer counter. For example, a timer counter having a different update interval, for example, a timer, is used. Interrupt processing (main) By providing a first timer counter that is updated once every four times and a second timer counter that is updated once every fourteen times, a relative value can be obtained without providing a 2-byte counter. It is also possible to employ a configuration for measuring a long time interval. By doing so, it is not necessary to provide a process for updating a 1-byte timer value and a process for updating a 2-byte timer value. It is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the update.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of timer counters are assigned to special works that are not initialized in accordance with the progress of the game in the RAM 41c, and are not initialized in accordance with the progress of the game. Regardless of the progress of the game, it is possible to measure the time spanning the timing when a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game.

  In particular, in this embodiment, not only the timer counter that may cross the timing when the measurement period ends in one game, that is, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized as the game progresses, Since the timer counter that does not cross over the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress is stored in the area assigned to the special work together with other timer counters, the timer counter can be easily managed. In addition, a timer counter that does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game is set, and a timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized at the measurement period according to the progress of the game. The usage of the timer counter can be easily changed by a later design change, such as changing to a timer counter that may straddle. It can be. In addition, as described above, if a single timer counter is shared for a plurality of types of periods in which measurement periods do not overlap, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized may be crossed as the game progresses. It is possible to measure the measurement period and the measurement period that does not cross the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized in accordance with the progress of the game with one timer counter.

  24 to 26 are diagrams for explaining a lottery target role in the internal lottery by the main control unit 41, a gaming state to be a lottery target, a setting difference, presence / absence of an AT lottery, and whether to be a navigation target. is there. Also, FIG. 27 is for explaining the transition of the gaming state (RT1-4, inside, RB (including RB in BB1, RB in BB2, RB winning RB)) controlled by the main control unit 41. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, combinations of lottery object combinations that are read as lottery object combinations (including AT) for each gaming state in the internal lottery will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as the lottery target roles to be subject to the internal lottery, the lottery target roles related to the replaying role (see FIG. 24), the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role, which are related to AT control 25), lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles, which are not related to AT control (see FIG. 26) are determined in advance, and each lottery target role is determined according to the gaming state. The number of values is set. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” corresponding to a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). For this reason, for example, the winning probability of the lottery subject for which “300” is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536. In addition, for each lottery target combination, when the lottery is subject to lottery according to the game state, a number of determination values of 4 or more is set in advance (indicated by “◯” in FIGS. 24 to 26). When winning with a probability of 1/16384 "(4/65536) or more, but not subject to lottery according to the gaming state, 0 is set as the number of determination values (in Figs. 24 to 26," -"), The lottery subject is not won.

  In addition, each lottery target role includes a predetermined winning combination, and winning of the winning combination included in the lottery target role is permitted by winning one lottery target role in the internal lottery. As a result, a combination of symbols constituting a winning combination in which a winning is permitted is stopped on the winning lines LN of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Then, according to the winning combination of the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN, when the winning combination is a re-playing combination, replay is given, and when the winning combination is a small combination, If a predetermined number of medals is paid out according to the winning combination, and the winning combination is a special combination, the special state is controlled.

  In addition, some of the lottery roles that are subject to the lottery in the internal lottery include AT, and at the start of the game in which the internal lottery is performed, the lottery subject role including AT is in a state that is not controlled by the AT. By winning, it is determined to be controlled by the AT. In addition, at the start of the game in which the internal lottery is performed, it is determined that the lottery subject including AT is elected in a state controlled by the AT, so that the number of remaining games of the AT is added, and the winning AT The number of additional games determined in advance according to the type of the lottery target combination including the number of games will be added to the number of remaining AT games. In this embodiment, some of the lottery target roles include an AT, and the lottery target role including the AT wins, so that the AT and the extra game are won, but the lottery target including the AT is selected. When the role is won, it is decided to perform AT lottery to determine whether or not to control the AT, and extra lottery to determine whether or not to give an extra game. At the time of deciding whether to give an AT or an extra game, an AT lottery or an extra lottery will be triggered by the winning of the role, and by winning in that lottery, the AT and the extra game can be elected Alternatively, the second lottery may be performed when the result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined result. Further, when the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to give an AT and an additional game, the AT is determined based only on the result of the internal lottery, and the result of the internal lottery is determined for the number of additional games. A configuration may be adopted in which a second lottery is performed and determined when a predetermined result is obtained. Further, when the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to give the AT and the extra game, the AT performs the second stage lottery when the result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined result. The number of added games may be determined based only on the result of the internal lottery. Further, the main control unit 41 may be configured to perform a lottery of three or more stages when determining whether or not to give an AT and an additional game.

  In addition, among the lottery eligible roles, for the lottery subject related to the special role, the game state is in a normal gaming state where the special role is not carried over, during the carryover (inside) where the special role is carried over, or in a special state. Depending on a certain RB (including RBs in BB1 and BB2), at least one of the lottery target role to be subject to the internal lottery or its judgment value number (winning probability) is different. Lottery subject to internal lottery depending on whether it is a normal game state, carrying over (inside), RB in BB1 (BB1), RB in BB2 (BB2), or RB by RB winning (RB in the figure) At least one of the combination or the number of judgment values (winning probability) is different, and for the lottery target combination regarding the re-game combination, the game state is RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4. At least one of the lottery subject role as a target of the internal lottery or a determination value of the number (winning probability) depending differs.

  As shown in FIG. 24, as a lottery target role relating to replay, normal replay, RT2 transition replay 1, RT2 transition replay 2, RT2 transition replay 3, RT2 transition replay 4, RT2 transition replay 5, RT2 Transition replay 6, RT3 transition replay, RT1 transition replay 1, RT1 transition replay 2, RT1 transition replay 3, RT1 transition replay 4, RT1 transition replay 5, RT1 transition replay 6, Advantageous state transition re A game 1, an advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, an advantageous state transition re-game 2 and an advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are included. Each of these lottery eligible roles includes one or more re-playing roles as a winning role, and any re-playing role must be awarded by winning the lottery-related role related to replaying in the internal lottery. Then, a replay game (replay) is given.

  In RT0, the number of determination values of 4 or more is set for normal replays among the lottery target roles related to replay, and the number of determination values of 0 is set for the lottery target roles related to other replays. . In RT1, the number of determination values is set to 4 or more for normal replay, RT2 transition replay 1 to 6, advantageous state transition regame 1 + AT, and advantageous state transition replay 2 + AT. For the lottery target combination, a determination value number of 0 is set. In RT2, the number of determination values is set to 4 or more for normal replay, RT3 transition replay, RT1 transition replay 1 to 6, advantageous state transition replay 1 + AT, advantageous state transition replay 2 + AT, With respect to other lottery target combinations relating to other replays, the number of determination values of 0 is set. In RT3, the number of determination values is set to 4 or more for normal replay, RT1 transition replay 1 to 6, advantageous state transition replay 1 + AT, and advantageous state transition replay 2 + AT. For the lottery target combination, a determination value number of 0 is set. In the inside, the number of judgment values is set to 4 or more for the normal replay, and the advantageous state transition replay 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition replay 2 + AT are invalid and are read in the internal lottery. The number of determination values of 0 is set for the lottery target combination relating to other replays. Further, in the RB, the number of determination values of 0 is set for the lottery target combination relating to these replays.

  In the present embodiment, a lottery target for which a determination value number of 4 or more is set can be won in an internal lottery in a gaming state in which the determination value number is set. However, the lottery target combination for which the determination value number of 0 is set is not won by the internal lottery in the gaming state in which the determination value number is set, and is not a substantial lottery target. For example, in the advantageous state transition replay 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition replay 2 + AT, since the determination value number of 4 or more is set in any gaming state, it becomes a substantial lottery target in any gaming state. The advantageous state transition regame 1 and the advantageous state transition regame 2 are not subject to substantial lottery in any gaming state because the number of determination values of 0 is set in any gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, there is no setting difference for the lottery target for replaying, and the winning is performed by the internal lottery with the same probability regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. To do.

  Further, among the lottery target roles related to replay, the advantageous state transition regame 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition regame 2 + AT are the targets of the AT lottery, and when the lottery target role is won in a state that is not controlled by the AT. When the winning combination is won in the state controlled by the AT, the addition of the remaining number of games of the AT is won. On the other hand, when a lottery subject for other replays is won, it means that the AT has not won (non-winning).

  In addition, among the lottery target roles related to replays, RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 and RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are navigation targets, and these lottery target roles are won in a state controlled by the AT. When this is done, navigation notification is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, a lottery target role relating to a small role and a special role, and as a lottery target role related to AT control, cherry, cherry + AT, watermelon, watermelon + AT, push order bell 1, push order bell 2 , Push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, push order bell 6, SB, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry, BB1 + cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + watermelon + AT BB2 + cherry, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon, BB2 + watermelon + AT. Each of these lottery eligible roles includes one or more small roles and special roles as winning prizes. If a lottery target for a small role and special roles is elected in the internal lottery, When a small role wins, the number of medals corresponding to the small role is paid out, and when a special role is won as a winning role, it is controlled to a special state according to the special role, and no winning role is won. If it happens, it will be off.

  Among RT0-3 and the inside, among the lottery target roles relating to small roles and special roles, cherry + AT, watermelon + AT, push order bell 1, push order bell 2, push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, For push order bell 6, SB, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon + AT, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon + AT, 4 or more judgment values are set. Among the lottery-related roles relating to “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, “RB + Cherry”, “RB + Watermelon”, “BB1 + Cherry”, “BB1 + Watermelon”, “BB2 + Cherry”, and “BB2 + Watermelon”, the number of determination values of 0 is set. Also, in RB, among the lottery target roles relating to the small role and the special role, cherry, watermelon, push order bell 1, push order bell 2, push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, push order bell 6 The number of judgment values is set to 4 or more, and among the lottery target roles relating to the small role and the special role, Cherry + AT, Watermelon + AT, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + AT, RB + Watermelon, RB + Watermelon + AT, BB1 + Cherry, BB1 + For Cherry + AT, BB1 + Watermelon, BB1 + Watermelon + AT, BB2 + Cherry, BB2 + Cherry + AT, BB2 + Watermelon, BB2 + Watermelon + AT, the number of determination values of 0 is set.

  In the present embodiment, in the RB, by setting the number of determination values of the lottery target roles including AT (small role + AT, special role + small role + AT, special role + AT) to 0, during RB (in BB1, In BB2 and RB), the number of ATs and ATs to be described later is not won. However, even during RB, the number of determination values for the lottery target role including AT is set to 4 or more, The configuration may be such that the number of AT and AT added games can be won, and as such a configuration, for example, there is a difference in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the set values (1 to 6) of the slot machine 1 In the RB controlled by the winning of the special role that has not been won, the number of determination values of the lottery target role including the AT may be set to 4 or more, and the number of games added to the AT and AT may be selected. Set value of 1 (1 6) In the RB controlled in response to the winning of the special role that has a difference in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to 6), the number of determination values of the lottery target role including AT is 4 or more, It is good also as a structure which can win the number of additional games of AT.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, for the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role and related to the control of the AT, there is no setting difference in any lottery target role, and the slot Wins by internal lottery with the same probability regardless of the set value (1-6) of machine 1.

  Among the lottery roles for small roles and special roles, Cherry + AT, Watermelon + AT, RB + Cherry + AT, RB + Watermelon + AT, BB1 + Cherry + AT, BB1 + Watermelon + AT, BB2 + Cherry + AT, BB2 + Watermelon + AT are eligible for the lottery. When the lottery target role is won in a state that is not controlled by the AT, it means that the AT has been won. When the lottery target role is elected in the state that is controlled by the AT, the number of remaining games of the AT The extra will be won. On the other hand, when a lottery target role related to other small roles and special roles and related to AT control is won, the AT is not won (non-winning).

  In addition, push order bells 1 to 6 among the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role are navigation targets, and when these lottery target roles are elected in a state controlled by the AT, a navigation notification is issued. Done. On the other hand, when a lottery target role related to other small roles and special roles and a lottery target role related to AT control is won, navigation notification is not performed regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT.

  In the inside and RB (including RB, RB in BB1, and RB in BB2), special roles, special roles + AT, special roles + general roles are not subject to internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role, which are not related to the AT control, include Bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay. It is. Each of these lottery roles includes one or more small roles, special roles, and re-playing roles, and if the lottery roles related to small roles and special roles are elected in the internal lottery, When a small role is won as a winning combination, the number of medals corresponding to the small role is paid out. When a special role is won as a winning role, the special state is controlled according to the special role, When the game is won, a replay game (replay) is given, and when no winning combination is won, the game is lost.

  Within RT0-3, among the lottery target roles relating to the small role and special role, 4 or more judgment value numbers are set for Bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay. . In RB, the number of determination values of 4 or more is set for the bell, and the number of determination values is set to 0 for RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, and BB2, BB2 + special replay.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 26, for the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role and not related to the control of the AT, any lottery target role has a setting difference, and the slot machine Winning by internal lottery with different probabilities according to 1 set value (1-6).

  Also, among the lottery roles related to small roles and special roles, none of Bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay are eligible for AT lottery, When winning, the AT and the number of added games will be out of play.

  Also, among the lottery eligible roles related to small roles and special roles, Bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay are not subject to navigation, and these lottery eligible roles were elected Sometimes, navigation notification is not performed regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT.

  Next, the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 and the outline of the gaming state will be described based on FIG. 27 and FIG.

  In this embodiment, the game state controlled by the main control unit 41 includes bonuses as a special state in the inside where RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3 and special roles (RB, BB1, BB2) are carried over as normal game states. (RB, RB in BB1, RB in BB2) are included and controlled to one of the gaming states.

  RT0 shifts at the end of the bonus (BB1-3, RB). Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT0 transitions to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or SB wins, or by winning a special role End by moving inside. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

  In RT1, a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN at RT0, or an SB wins. In RT2 and RT3, a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or RT1 transition is resumed. It shifts when a game or SB wins. Then, RT1 is terminated by transitioning to RT2 when the RT2 transition replay wins regardless of the number of games since transitioning to RT1, or transitioning to the inside by winning a special role. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

  RT2 shifts when RT2 transition replay wins at RT1. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT2 transitions to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or transitions to RT3 when RT3 transition replay wins. It ends when the special role is elected and moves inside. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed at least in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

  RT3 shifts when RT3 transition replay wins at RT2. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT3, RT3 transitions to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or RT1 transition replay, SB wins, It ends when the special role is elected and moves inside. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed at least in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

  During the inside, RT0-3 shifts by winning special roles (RB, BB1, BB2). During the inside, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the inside, the special role that triggered the transition to the inside wins a bonus (RB, RB in BB1, RB in BB2). It ends by migrating. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

  RB (RB) shifts in the interior due to RB winning. Then, the RB ends when 12 games are digested or the game is won six times. Also, in RB, special roles and re-playing roles are not subject to internal lottery, and the winning probability of small roles is higher than RT0-3 and high probability (about 1 / 1.0), and per game The medal payout rate exceeds 100%.

  BB1 and BB2 (RB) shift in the inside due to winning of BB1 and BB2. In BB1 and BB2, the total number of medals paid out during BB1 and BB2 exceeds the specified number (316 in this embodiment) regardless of the number of games since the transition to BB1 and BB2. finish. Also, in BB1 and BB2, the above-mentioned RB is always controlled, and in RB in BB1 and BB2, the special combination and the replaying combination are excluded from the internal lottery. It is higher than RT0-3 and has a high probability (about 1 / 1.0), and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%.

  Among the bonuses (RB, BB1, BB2), the bonuses (RB, BB1, BB2) are the most advantageous gaming state with the highest medal payout rate per game. RT2 and RT3 of RT0 to 3 have a high probability of winning a re-gamer, and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT0 and 1, compared with RT0 and 1. It can be said that this is an advantageous state. RT 2 and 3 among RT 2 and 3 and the inside are more advantageous to the player than the inside in that the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that inside.

  Next, a combination of symbols that stop on the reel winning line LN in accordance with the type of lottery target in the internal lottery and the stop order will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, when RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won as lottery roles in the internal lottery, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type and stop order. . The RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 include at least an RT2 transition replay player and a normal replay player as a winning combination, and the RT2 transition replaying player is given a replay game by winning a prize. And the game state is transferred to RT2, and the normal re-game player includes a re-game player who only receives a replay game by winning.

  For example, when RT2 transition replay 1 is won, the stop operation is performed in the left middle right stop order (the left reel as the first stop, the middle reel as the second stop, the stop order to stop the right reel as the third stop). When performed, the combination of symbols constituting the RT2 transition re-gamer is stopped on the winning line LN while the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the stop order of the left middle right, The combination of symbols constituting the game combination stops on the winning line LN. Also, when the RT2 transition replays 2 to 6 are won, as in the case of the RT2 transition replays 1 to be won, the RT2 transition replays 2 to 6 are in a predetermined stop order determined in advance according to the types of the RT2 transition replays 2 to 6. When the stop operation is performed, the combination of symbols constituting the RT2 transition re-gamer is stopped on the winning line LN, while the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order. The combination of symbols composing the re-playing combination stops on the winning line LN.

  As a result, when the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won in RT1, the RT2 transition regame player wins by operating in the stop order corresponding to the type, but if the type is not known, the type is intentionally However, if the stop order matches, the RT2 transition re-gamer can be awarded to make a transition to RT2, but if the stop order does not match, the normal re-game player Will win and RT1 will be maintained.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, when RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won as lottery roles in the internal lottery, the combination of symbols that stop according to the type and stop order Is different. The RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 include at least an RT1 transition replaying role and a normal replaying role as a winning combination. The RT1 transition replaying role is a replaying role to which a replay game is given by winning a prize. In addition, the game state is a transition combination in which the game state is transferred to RT1, and the normal re-game combination is a re-play game combination in which a replay game is only given by winning.

  When the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are elected, if the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order determined in advance according to the type of the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, the symbols constituting the normal regame player When the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order, the combination of symbols constituting the RT1 transition re-playing combination stops on the pay line LN. .

  As a result, at the time of winning RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 in RT2 and RT3, the normal regame player wins by operating in the order of stop corresponding to the type, but if the type is not known intentionally The stop order according to the type cannot be selected, and if the stop order matches, it is possible to avoid the transition to RT1 by winning the normal re-gamer, but the stop order must match. In this case, the RT1 transition re-gamer wins and is transferred to RT1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, when RT3 transition replay is won as a lottery target in internal lottery, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type and stop order. There is no. The RT3 transition replay includes at least an RT3 transition replay as a winning combination. The RT3 transition replay is a replay that is given a replay game by winning and the gaming state is changed to RT3. It is a transition role to be migrated.

  When the RT3 transition re-game is won, the combination of symbols constituting the RT3 transition re-game is stopped on the winning line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, when the RT3 transition re-game is won in RT2, regardless of the order of stoppage, the RT3 transition re-game player wins and the RT3 transition re-game wins, so that the RT3 transition is made to RT3.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, even when advantageous state transition replays 1 and 2 are selected as internal lotteries, the symbols that stop according to the type and stop order are selected. The combination is never different. The advantageous state transition re-game 1 includes at least the advantageous state transition re-player 1 as a winning combination, and the advantageous state transition re-player 1 is a re-playing portion to which a replay game is given by winning. At the same time, it is a transitional role that is shifted to an advantageous state (a state in which AT control is performed). In addition, the advantageous state transition replay game 2 includes at least the advantageous state transition replay player 2 as a winning combination, and the advantageous state transition replay player 2 receives a replay game to which a replay game is given by winning. And a transitional role that shifts to an advantageous state (a state in which AT control is performed).

  When the advantageous state transfer replays 1 and 2 are won, the combination of symbols constituting the selected advantageous state transfer replay players 1 and 2 stops on the winning line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, when the advantageous state transition replays 1 and 2 are won in RT 1 to 3, regardless of the stop order, the advantageous state transition regamer wins, and the advantageous state transition regamer wins to enter the advantageous state. Will be migrated.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in this embodiment, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won as the lottery object combination in the internal lottery, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type and stop order. The push order bells 1 to 6 include at least a bell and a special small combination as a winning combination. The bell is a small combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. Further, the special small combination is a small combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize, which is smaller than when a bell is won.

  For example, when the push order bell 1 is elected, the stop operation is performed in the left middle right stop order (the left reel as the first stop, the middle reel as the second stop, the stop order to stop the right reel as the third stop). If the combination of symbols constituting the bell stops on the winning line LN, but the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the left middle right stop order, the symbols constituting the special small part Or a combination of specific symbols that does not accompany the medal is stopped on the winning line LN. Also, when the push order bells 2 to 6 are elected, the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order determined in advance according to the type of the push order bells 2 to 6 in the same manner as when the push order bell 1 is won. When performed, the combination of symbols constituting the bell stops on the winning line LN, while when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order, the symbols constituting the special small part are displayed. A combination of specific symbols not accompanied by a combination or medal is stopped on the winning line LN.

  For this reason, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the push order bells 1 to 6 are operated in the stop order. In particular, in RT2 and RT3, the specific symbol stops when the stop order does not match. Therefore, if the stop order does not match, the process proceeds to RT1 at a certain rate.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, in this embodiment, when the SB is won as a lottery target in the internal lottery, regardless of the stop order, the specific symbols constituting the SB winning are given priority to the winning line. Stop at LN. For this reason, in RT0-3, at the time of SB winning, a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the specific symbol can be stopped, so that the specific symbol constituting the SB winning will stop and shift to RT1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, in this embodiment, when RB1 + cherry, BB1 + cherry, BB2 + cherry is selected as a lottery target role in the internal lottery, the cherry symbols are given priority regardless of the stop order. And stop at the winning line LN. In addition, when RB1 + watermelon, BB1 + watermelon, and BB2 + watermelon are won as the lottery winning combination in the internal lottery, regardless of the order of stoppage, the watermelon components are preferentially stopped on the winning line LN. As a result, when these special roles + small roles are elected, a stop operation is performed at a timing when the small symbols can be stopped. The winning special role will be carried over after the next game, and the stoppage will be performed at the timing when the constituent symbol of the small role cannot be stopped and the constituent symbol of the selected special role can be stopped Will stop and the bonus will be transferred.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, in this embodiment, when BB1 + special replay and BB2 + special replay are won as a lottery target part in the internal lottery, the configuration of the special replay regardless of the stop order. The symbol has priority and stops on the winning line LN. As a result, when these special roles + special replays are won, the special replay configuration symbols are stopped and the selected special roles are carried over from the next game onward.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is RT1, 2, 3, the main control unit 41 can execute a navigation notification that notifies the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period.

  When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 performs navigation notification by winning the notification target combination corresponding to the gaming state, and the first internal winning command to the sub control unit 91 By transmitting the second internal winning command and the pressing order command, the navigation control by the sub-control unit 91 is executed. The notification target combination corresponding to the game state is RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 and push order bells 1 to 6 when RT1 and RT1 transition replay games 1 to 6 and push order bells 1 to 6 when RT2. It is. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification and execute a navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in a normal state where AT is not set. The navigation notification according to the present embodiment notifies the stop order advantageous for the player in an identifiable manner by changing the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12.

  The navigation effect of the present embodiment notifies the stop order advantageous for the player notified by the navigation notification by displaying the navigation image from the liquid crystal display 51 and the output of the navigation sound from the speakers 53 and 54. For example, when informing the stop order of the left middle right stop switch 8L such as “123” (indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop), Stop order images indicating the stop order of 8C and 8R are displayed. In addition, as the navigation voice, for example, “left middle right!” (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop) Is output. Further, when the stop order in which the left reel is first stopped is notified, the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R such as “1--” (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is indicated. Display stop order images. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, “left!” (Indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) (indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) indicating the stop switch stop order is output. To do. In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a player is distinguishable according to a winning condition. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to using the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54, but may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  In the navigation notification and the navigation effect, when any one of the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the RT2 transition replay wins is notified in an identifiable manner. Further, when any of the push order bells 1 to 6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the bells win is notified in an identifiable manner. Also, in RT2, when any of RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 is won in RT3, the stop order in which the normal replay wins is identifiable in an identifiable manner. In addition, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won in both RT2 and RT3, the stop order in which the bells win is notified in an identifiable manner. Further, when the SB is won, the fact that the SB has been won is notified in an identifiable manner.

  Thus, in the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the stop order that is advantageous to the player is notified in an identifiable manner. For this reason, the player can intentionally make the RT2 transition re-game win in RT1 and shift to RT2 or win the bell by performing stop operations in the order of stop according to the navigation effect. In RT 2 and 3, it is possible to avoid the winning of the RT 1 transition re-game by winning the normal re-game, to win the bell, to stop the specific symbol, and to avoid the winning of the SB.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to control to AT by internal lottery. When the main control unit 41 wins the AT in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 controls the AT through a precursor period. The state from the start of the AT control to the transition to RT2 is also referred to as a preparation state. The main control unit 41 performs navigation notification when the target combination is won in the preparation state. At this time, in RT1, navigation notification is made when RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won, and the stop order for winning RT2 transition replays when RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won is notified by navigation notification. By performing the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, it is possible to win the RT2 transition replay and shift from RT1 to RT2. In addition, after the transition to the preparation state, the stop order for winning the middle bell when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won is notified, so that a medal can be reliably obtained by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. It becomes possible.

  The main control unit 41 ends the preparation state when the RT2 transition replay wins at RT1 and transitions to RT2. Accordingly, the main control unit 41 sets the predetermined number of games as the number of remaining AT games assigned to the RAM 91c, and starts counting the number of remaining AT games. Even after the transition to RT1, the stop order for winning the bells is notified when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, so it is possible to reliably acquire medals by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. At the same time, it is possible to avoid the stop of the specific symbol and avoid the transition to RT1. In addition, after the transition to RT2, since the stop order for winning the normal replay is notified when winning RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, the RT1 transition replay is performed by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. It is possible to wait until the RT3 transition combination is won, and to make the RT3 transition combination win and shift to RT3. It is possible to avoid the transition to RT1, and since the fact that the SB has been won is notified when the SB is won, it is possible to avoid winning the SB and avoid the transition to RT1.

  Further, after the start of AT, every time one game is consumed, the remaining game number is decremented by 1, and when the remaining game number becomes 0, the AT control is terminated. As a result, the navigation notification is not executed, so that it is possible to avoid stopping the specific symbol when winning the push order bells 1 to 6, and avoid winning the RT1 transition replay when winning the RT1 transition replay 1 to 6. It becomes impossible, and a series of AT control is completed by shifting to RT1 by stopping a specific symbol or winning RT1 transition replay. Further, after the AT is started and before the remaining number of games becomes 0, when the addition of the remaining number of games of AT is won by internal lottery, the number of won games is added to the number of remaining games of AT.

  Further, after the AT starts, if the special combination is won before the remaining number of games becomes 0, the AT is interrupted by the end of RT1, and the counting of the AT games is also interrupted accordingly. If the special role is won during the AT and the AT is interrupted, the bonus will be controlled through the winning special role, and then the corresponding bonus will be stopped at RT0 after the bonus ends and the RT1 will stop. At the time of the transition, the AT control is resumed, and along with this, the transition to the RT2 is resumed through the preparation state, thereby restarting the counting of the AT remaining games.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 notifies the stop order in which the bell wins by navigation notification when the push order bells 1 to 6 in the AT are selected, and the stop operation is performed by ignoring the notified stop order. In some cases, the bell wins and RT2 and 3 are maintained, but the specific symbol may stop and shift to RT1. Also, when the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are elected and the stop operation is performed ignoring the notified stop order, the RT1 transition replay wins and the transition to RT1 occurs. During the AT, when the transition from RT2, 3 to RT1 is performed, the AT continues, and every time one game is completed, the remaining number of games of the AT is decremented by 1, and the RT2 transition replay 11 at RT1 is performed as in the preparation state. It is possible to notify the stop order for winning the RT1 transition replay at the time of winning through 6 by the navigation notification, and to make the RT1 transition regame win and shift from RT1 to RT2 by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. Is possible.

  Next, the control content of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery subject, and a lottery subject that may be carried over, that is, a special winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special role is set, A lottery target that is not carried over, that is, a general winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general winning is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the special role winning number table, when none of the special roles are won, that is, the lost winning number is “0”, and the winning numbers of BB1, BB2, RB, and SB are “1”. "To" 4 "are assigned. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32, in the general winning number table, when no general winning is won, that is, “0” is selected as the winning number in the case of a loss, “1” to “16” are assigned “20” to “28” as the winning numbers of the lottery target roles related to the small role. As described above, in the special combination winning number table and the general combination winning number table, the lottery subject for internal lottery and the winning number are set correspondingly.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes an internal lottery process when a start operation is performed, and when any of the special combination and the general combination is won in the internal lottery The winning number corresponding to the lottery subject for which the winning is determined is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if no winning combination is won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared at the end of one game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the selected special role is won by winning Cleared.

  After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes an internal winning command setting process, and based on the internal winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the timer interruption process (main) thereafter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, in the internal winning command setting process, first, the winning number of the special role set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sk1), and the acquired winning number is displayed. The transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of 2 bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). When storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, 41 stores MODE indicating that the first internal winning command is in the first byte, and winning for sending the special role in the second byte EXT. Stores the number.

  In the step of Sk3, after storing the first internal winning command, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sk4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. It is determined whether there is (Sk5), less than 15 (Sk6), less than 22 (Sk7), and less than 28 (Sk8). It is determined which of a plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in a predetermined range.

  If it is determined in step Sk5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, if the winning number is 0 or 1, the acquired winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk9). If it is determined that the winning number is not less than 2 in the step of Sk5 and is less than 15 in the step of Sk6, that is, if the winning number is any of 2 to 14, 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk10). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 15 in the step of Sk6 and it is determined that it is less than 22 in the step of Sk7, that is, when the winning number is either 20 or 21, the winning number is The winning number for transmission is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk9). If it is determined that the winning number is not less than 22 in the Sk7 step and it is determined that it is less than 28 in the Sk8 step, that is, if the winning number is any of 22 to 27, the winning number for transmission is used. 22 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk10). If it is determined in step Sk8 that the winning number is not less than 28, that is, if the winning number is 28, the winning number is set as a transmission winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk9).

  Then, after the transmission winning number for the general role is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps Sk9, Sk10, and Sk11, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. When storing the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating that it is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and plays a general role in the second byte of EXT. Stores the winning number for transmission.

  After the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue in the step of Sk10, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  Thus, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the special role set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the winning number for transmission, and the first including the winning number for transmission is included. Set the internal winning command in the command queue.

  Further, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 15 to 21, 28). In this case, the winning number is set as a transmission winning number, and the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 16 to 21, 28) is set in the internal winning, The winning number by internal lottery can be specified based on the winning number for transmission included.

  On the other hand, when the winning number is in the second predetermined range (2 to 14), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmitting winning number, and the transmitting winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. Thereby, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range (2 to 14) is set in the internal winning, the winning number for transmission included in the command is transmitted. On the other hand, it is impossible to specify which of the numbers in the second predetermined range (2-14) is the winning number, while the winning number is in the second predetermined range (2-14) It is possible to identify a certain thing.

  When the winning number is within the third predetermined range (22 to 27), one winning number (22) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmitting winning number, and the transmitting winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. Thereby, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range (22 to 27) is set in the internal winning, the winning number for transmission included in the command is transmitted. On the other hand, it is impossible to specify which of the numbers in the third predetermined range (22 to 27) the winning number is, but the winning number is in the third predetermined range (22 to 27). It is possible to identify a certain thing.

  The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment are then executed by the timer interrupt process (main), so that the sub-control unit 91 Are sequentially transmitted.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91. However, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data A form may be used. In this embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to transmit a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91. Although the configuration includes a winning number for transmission in the byte, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal winning command, the second internal winning command Each winning command is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the configuration in which the winning number for sending a special role or the winning number for sending a general role is included in the third byte, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. It may be configured by one signal composed of 3 bytes, and a transmission number for special role transmission may be included in the second byte, and a transmission number for general role transmission may be included in the third byte.

  Also, in this embodiment, the winning numbers of the special roles and the general roles are assigned separately, that is, the special roles corresponding to the types and losing of the special roles (BB1, BB2, RB, SB) in the special role winning number table. In the general winning number table, the winning numbers of the general winnings are set according to the types and deviations of the general winnings, and the main control unit 41 determines the special winnings according to the result of the internal lottery. The winning number and the winning number of the general combination are respectively set in predetermined areas of the RAM 41c, but the winning numbers are assigned without being divided into the special role and the general combination, for example, “BB1”, “small role”, “ A configuration may be adopted in which a winning number is assigned to each of “BB1 + small winning combination simultaneously won (for example, BB1 + cherry etc. shown in FIG. 25)”. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special combination and the small combination are selected based only on the one winning number. It is possible to perform predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc.).

  Next, the control content of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG.

  In this embodiment, a navigation number (0 to 9) that can identify the stop order of reels by navigation notification and a navigation number (10 to 13) that can identify a predetermined symbol suggested by navigation notification are assigned in advance, and lottery Among the target combinations, a navigation number is assigned in advance to each type of notification target combination, and a navigation number table in which a navigation number for each type of lottery target combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 34, as the navigation number, 0 indicating the standard push order (in this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop), the first stop is the left reel 2L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 2C, 1 indicating the stop order in which the third stop is the right reel 2R, 1, 2 indicating the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 2L, the second stop is the right reel 2R, and the third stop is the middle reel 2C. Stop order is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the left reel 2L, the third stop is the right reel 2R, and the stop order is 3, the first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the right reel 2R, and the third stop is left 4 indicates the stop order of the reel 2L, 5 indicates the stop order of the right reel 2L, the second stop is the left reel 2L, the third stop is the middle reel 2C, the first stop is the right reel 2R, 2 indicates the stop order with 2 stops as the middle reel 2C and 3rd stop as the left reel 2L. The stop order in which 2L is the first stop, ie, 7 indicating the left first stop, the stop order in which the middle reel 2C is the first stop, ie, 8 indicating the middle first stop, the stop order in which the right reel 2R is the first stop, 9 indicating the first right stop is set. Further, as a navigation number, 10 suggests a stop operation at a timing when the red 7 symbol can be stopped on the winning line LN, and 11 indicates a stop operation at a timing when the blue 7 symbol can be stopped on the winning line LN. 12 indicating a stop operation at a timing when the symbol of white 7 can be stopped on the winning line LN and 13 indicating a stop operation at a timing when the symbol of BAR can be stopped on the winning line LN are set.

  In this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is stopped first is applied as the standard push order specified by the navigation number 0. However, the standard push order is disadvantageously advantageous for the player. Other stop orders may be used as long as the standard push order does not occur.

  In the navigation number table, a navigation number is set for each type of special role. 10 is set for BB1, 11 is set for BB2, 12 is set for RB, and 13 is set for SB. It should be noted that 0 is set in the case where the special combination is not won.

  Further, in the navigation number table, a navigation number is set for each type of notification target combination among lottery target combinations. For RT2 transition replay 1, RT1 transition replay 1, and push order bell 1, "1" is set. "2" for RT2 transition replay 2, RT1 transition replay 2, push order bell 2, "3" for RT2 transition replay 3, RT1 transition replay 3, push order bell 3 RT2 transition replay 4, RT1 transition replay 4, push order bell 4 is “4”, RT2 transition replay 5, RT1 transition replay 5, push order bell 5 is “5”, RT2 “6” is set for the transition replay 6, the RT1 transition replay 6, and the push order bell 6. Note that no navigation number is set for the normal replay, the RT3 transition replay, the advantageous state transition replay 1, 2, cherry, watermelon, and bell, which are not the notification target combinations among the lottery target.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 wins the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the start operation is performed and when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. A push order command setting process for setting a push order command corresponding to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the push order command setting process, first, the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process are acquired (Sm1), and then the RAM 41c. Referring to a predetermined flag indicating whether or not navigation notification is set in the predetermined area, a state in which navigation notification is performed (when navigation notification is performed during AT or non-AT, will be described later) It is determined whether or not the special role navigation notification condition is established until the special role is won (Sm2). If it is determined in step Sm2 that the navigation notification is not performed, whether or not the winning combination to be stopped on the winning line LN is confirmed based on the stop status of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the result of the internal lottery. (Sm5), and if the winning combination is not confirmed in the winning line LN, the standard navigation number (0 in this embodiment) is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sm6).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the navigation notification is in the state at step Sm2, or when it is determined at step Sm5 that the winning combination to be stopped on the winning line LN is determined, it is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. With reference to the navigation number table, the navigation number corresponding to the winning number of the special combination and the general combination acquired in step Sm1 is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, if it is determined that the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won based on the internal winning number, the combination of the RT2 transition replays stops on the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination The navigation number indicating the stop order to be set is set as the transmission navigation number. Further, when it is specified that RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won, the navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination of normal replays is stopped on the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination Is set as the sending navigation number.

  Further, when it is specified that the push order bells 1 to 6 are won based on the internal winning numbers, the stop order in which the combination of the bells is stopped on the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. The navigation number shown is set as the transmission navigation number.

  Also, any of the special roles (BB1, BB2, RB, SB) is won based on the internal winning number, and the conditions for executing the special role navigation notification (in this embodiment, after winning the special role, the predetermined game If it is after a certain number (for example, 5 games have passed) is established and it is specified that none of the small roles has been won (out of the game), the type of the special role that has been won In response, the navigation number (10-13) that suggests the symbol that constitutes the special combination is set as the transmission navigation number.

  After the transmission navigation number is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Sm3 or step Sm6, a push order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sm4). When storing the push order command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the push order command in the first byte, and stores the transmission navigation number in EXT of the second byte.

  After the push order command is stored in the command queue in step Sm4, the push order command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  Thus, when the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process, which is advantageous for the player when the navigation notification is being executed. When a push order command that can specify a stop operation mode is set in the command queue and navigation notification is not being executed, it is impossible to specify a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, which is also disadvantageous to the player. Also, a push order command that can specify the stop order, which is a standard stop operation mode, is set in the command queue.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs a push order command setting process every time a stop operation is performed, so that even when the navigation notification is not being executed, the main control unit 41 stops at the winning line LN. Is determined, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is set in the command queue.

  Further, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process, so that, for example, the game state is RT1, and the RT2 transition regame 1 is won in a state where no navigation notification is performed. In this case, when none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the RT2 transition replay and the normal replay can be stopped, but it is not determined which combination will be stopped. A number (“0”) is set as the transmission navigation number, and a push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Also, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the RT2 transition replay and the normal transition replay can still be stopped, and it is not determined which combination will stop, so the transmission navigation number is standard. A push order command including the navigation number (“0”) is set. When the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the RT2 transition replay can be stopped by the subsequent stop of the right reel 2R, and the role of stopping Therefore, even if navigation notification is not performed, a navigation number (“1”) that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player (stop order for winning RT2 transition replay) is sent. Set as trusted Navi number. When a reel other than the left reel 2L is stopped in the first stop, after the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and when a reel other than the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, the subsequent stop Regardless of the order, only the normal replay can be stopped and the combination to be stopped is determined. Therefore, even in a state where the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation number (which can specify an advantageous stop order for the player) “1”) is set as the transmission navigation number.

  In addition, even when RT2 transition replays 2 to 6 are won in a state where the game state is RT1 and no navigation notification is performed, RT2 transition replay is performed in the same manner as when RT2 transition replay 1 is won. When it is not certain which combination of normal replay will be stopped, a push order command including a standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and either combination of RT2 transition replay or normal replay is stopped When it is determined whether or not to perform, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous for the player is set.

  In addition, for example, when the gaming state is RT2, 3 and the navigation notification is not performed and the RT1 transition replaying game 1 is won, and when any of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is not stopped, RT1 Transition replay and normal replay can be stopped, but it is not determined which combination will stop, so the standard navigation number ("0") that cannot specify the stop order of RT1 transition replay is It is set as the transmission navigation number, and a push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. When the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, only the normal re-game can be stopped, and the winning combination is fixed, so that it is advantageous for the player even when the navigation notification is not performed. A navigation number (“1”) that can specify the stop order (stop order in which the normal replay is won) is set as the transmission navigation number. Further, when the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped as the first stop, it is determined that only the RT1 transition replay is stopped, so that a navigation number (" 1 ") is set as the transmission navigation number.

  Also, when the gaming state is RT2, 3 and no navigation notification is made and RT1 transition replays 2-6 are won, RT1 transition is performed in the same manner as when RT1 transition regame 1 is won. When it is not determined which of the replay and the normal replay will be stopped, a push order command including a standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and either of the RT1 transition replay or the normal replay is played. When it is determined whether or not will stop, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is set.

  Also, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are elected in a state where navigation notification is not performed, in the same way as when the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are elected, When it is not determined whether the specific symbol is to be stopped, a push order command including a standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and it is advantageous for the player when it is determined which role or specific symbol is to be stopped. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify a particular stop order (stop order in which a bell is won) is set.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 does not control the AT, and when the notification target role is won, the main control unit 41 determines the stop order that is advantageous to the player at the timing determined for the player. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The timing at which the advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice role (the role that has three advantageous stop orders for the player), and the six-choice role (game) The first stop operation is performed in the roles that are advantageous to the user in six ways, for example, RT2 transition replays 1 to 6, RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 and push order bells 1 to 6 in this embodiment. In other words, it is the timing when it is determined that the winning combination advantageous to the player is not stopped, or the timing when the second stop operation is performed.

  In addition, in the game after the special role is elected and the predetermined navigation notification implementation conditions are satisfied with the special role winning being carried over, the internal lottery result is not a win for any small role. In this case, a push order command including a navigation number ("10" to "13") that suggests a symbol that constitutes one winning special role is set.

  The push order commands set in the push order command setting process of this embodiment are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt process (main) thereafter.

  When the sub control unit 91 specifies that the navigation notification is being performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the push order command, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command described above. In addition, a navigation effect is performed. When the sub control unit 91 performs the navigation effect, the winning of the notification target role is specified based on the second internal winning command, and the navigation number is other than “0” based on the push order command. That is, when it is specified that the pressing order advantageous to the player is other than the standard pressing order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a stop order image indicating the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the pressing order command. To display. In the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image that suggests a role that may be won based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, when push order bells 1 to 6 are elected as notification target roles, by displaying an image of “bell”, the possibility of winning the bell is suggested, and RT2 transition replay 1 to 6. When RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won, a replaying player who may win a prize based on a game state on the main control unit 41 side specified based on a game state command or the like A type of group (any one of RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 and RT1 transition replays 1 to 6) is identified, and a role included in the identified replay combination (for example, RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 is RT2 transition In the replay and RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, it is possible to suggest the possibility of winning a winning combination that is advantageous to the player by performing an effect according to the normal replay).

  Further, as an effect according to the combination included in the re-playing role group in the navigation effect, for example, even when the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command setting process on the main control unit 41 side , "2" indicating the winning of either RT2 transition replays 1-6 or RT1 transition replays 1-6 will be uniformly set as the winning number for transmission of the second internal winning command, The control unit 91 determines that the winning number for transmission is “2” based on the second internal winning command and that the gaming state is RT2 based on the gaming state command or the like, so that the transition to RT1 is performed. It is determined that replays 1 to 6 are won, and an image indicating the stop order corresponding to the navigation number specified based on the push order command, together with an image based on the stop order, the normal replay is performed. By displaying an image that suggests the possibility of winning (in this embodiment, an image showing a combination of symbols constituting a normal replay), it is advantageous for the player among the roles included in the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 It is possible to produce an effect corresponding to a combination (in this embodiment, a combination for maintaining RT2).

  In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the special role has been won based on the first internal winning command as an effect suggesting that the special role has been won in the navigation effect, When a predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) satisfying the conditions for performing the navigation notification are established, a final notification (notifying the liquid crystal display 51 of the special role) that the special role has been won in the internal lottery Display a message and an image indicating that has been won. Then, after performing the definite notification, that is, after the condition for executing the special role navigation notification is established, the navigation number specified based on the push order command indicates a predetermined symbol of the special role In addition, by performing a stop operation at a timing at which a predetermined symbol can be stopped on the winning line LN according to the navigation number, a special role winning promotion effect (for example, specified based on the navigation number) that promotes the winning of the special role is performed. Display on the liquid crystal display 51 for displaying an image of a predetermined pattern. In this way, the sub-control unit 91 performs a predetermined number of games after the special combination is won based on the first internal winning command, and the main control unit 41 side establishes the conditions for performing the special role navigation notification. The main control unit 41 includes a navigation number that suggests a symbol that allows the special combination to be awarded after the condition for performing the navigation notification of the special combination is established. By transmitting the push order command, the special control winning promotion effect based on the navigation number can be performed by the sub-control unit 91 after the confirmation notification is performed.

  Next, the control contents of the winning determination command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of winning combination for the special combination and the general combination, and a winning number table in which a winning number is set for each type of winning combination is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Yes.

  Whether the main control unit 41 receives a winning according to the combination of symbols stopped on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped after the start operation is performed. A winning determination process is performed to determine whether or not. In the winning determination process, for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped, and the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped. If it is determined, the winning number table is referred to, and the winning number corresponding to the combination of symbols constituting the stopped winning combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, while the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination is set. Is determined not to stop, “0” indicating a loss is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process is terminated.

  Then, after executing the winning determination process, the main control unit 41 executes a winning determination command setting process for setting a winning determination command capable of specifying the winning number in the command queue.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the winning determination command setting process, a winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the winning determination result in the winning determination process (Sn1), and the winning determination command is based on the winning number. Is stored in the command queue (Sn2), and the winning determination command setting process is terminated. When storing the winning determination command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in EXT of the second byte.

  The winning determination command set in the winning determination command setting process is then sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interruption process (main).

  As described above, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment executes the winning determination command setting process, sets the winning determination command including the winning number, A winning determination command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  In the winning determination command setting process of the present embodiment, a winning determination command including the winning number set in the RAM 41c in the winning determination process is set in the command queue, so that a special command or the like that can specify the winning number is used. The processing load can be reduced without performing the conversion process.

  In the present embodiment, since a winning number is assigned for each type of winning combination and stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning determination command including the winning number is based on the winning number. Thus, it is possible to specify a combination of symbols stopped on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and execute an effect.

  A conventional slot machine has a configuration including a game control unit that controls a game and an effect control unit that controls an effect. The game control unit displays an internal lottery result when a predetermined notification target role is won. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not to control to the AT in which the navigation notification for notifying the operation procedure of the stop switch which is advantageous for the player is executed, and when controlling to the AT, the navigation notification is executed and the internal lottery result Regardless of whether or not the AT is controlled by the AT, the internal winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit, and the effect control unit specifies the internal lottery result based on the internal winning command and controls the game. In the case where the AT is controlled by the AT, the navigation effect is generated to notify the operation procedure advantageous to the player based on the specified internal lottery result.

  In such a configuration, the effect control unit can identify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. In this way, although the game control unit has not decided to control the AT, an operation procedure advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is identified from the internal winning command, and the operation procedure is There is a possibility of being notified by the production control unit.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the first internal winning command and the general combination that can specify the winning situation of the special role as the internal lottery result as the internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A second internal winning command that can identify the winning status is set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, it is controlled by the AT. Regardless of whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but in general, it is not possible to specify a stop order advantageous to the player Since the second internal winning command related to the combination is set, the second internal winning command changes to the internal lottery result regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. A common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT without specifying an advantageous stopping order for the next player, so that the second internal winning command can be transmitted. This process can be simplified, and even if fraud is made on the side of the sub-control unit 91, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect without being controlled by the AT.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to notify the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, by navigation notification according to the notification target combination won by internal winning. The control unit 41 provides an operation mode operated at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode operated in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation mode based on a combination thereof by navigation notification. Even in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 specifies that the notification target role has been won regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Although the second internal winning command is set on the sub-control unit 91 side by setting the second internal winning command so that an operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified. Advantageous operation mode is not be identified for the player in accordance with the internal lottery result from de.

  Further, in this embodiment, as notification target roles for the main control unit 41 to execute navigation notification, push order replays (RT2 transition replays 1-6, RT1 transition replays 1-6) and push order bells (push order) In the internal winning command setting process, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination, the main control unit 41 determines whether the notification target combination is a push order replay. Since the second internal winning command is set so that it can be identified and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, the sub-control unit 91 notifies Whether the target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell can be specified, and the sub-control unit 91 can perform different effects depending on the type of the notification target combination.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls to the AT, and in the state where the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, the stop order advantageous for the player is specified. A push order command setting process for setting a push order command that can be performed is executed and the set push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the player on the side of the sub-control unit 91 in the state where the navigation notification is executed is performed. It is possible to perform a navigation effect that notifies an advantageous stop order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the push order command setting process. When the internal lottery result becomes the push order replay in the state of being played, and when the push order bell is reached, that is, in the state where the navigation notification is executed, the notification target roles won by the internal lottery are different However, when the stop order advantageous for the player is common, the push order command including the common navigation number that can specify the stop order advantageous for the player is set, so the types of push order commands can be reduced. it can.

  Further, in the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies a stop order that is advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role in a state in which navigation notification is executed. While a push order command including a navigation number that can be set is set, in a state other than a state where navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, it is not possible to specify a stop order advantageous to the player Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first left stop) is set, the result of the internal lottery becomes the notification target regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is executed. Sometimes, a process for setting a push order command including a navigation number can be shared.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R step by step every time the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. The order is determined before the operation of all stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, that is, the third stop operation is completed. For example, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, If the stop operation is performed, it is determined whether or not the bell can be won. When the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are elected, the first stop operation is performed, so that the RT2 transition replay can be won. When the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won, the second stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the normal replay is won, and the main control unit 41 Press In the event setting process, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined, that is, the first stop and the second stop. After the operation is performed, the sub-control unit 91 is cheated by setting and sending a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal winning result. However, whether or not the sub-control unit 91 has been operated in a stop order that is advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, while preventing the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being specified. It is possible to produce according to the situation.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the notification target combination is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. Is set, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous for the player is set, and the push order command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. However, a command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player after the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed and the stop combination is determined is different from the push order command. For example, it is advantageous for the player based on the type of the winning notification target role by sending another command including the winning number of the notification target role won in the internal lottery. It may be configured to allow identifying stop order, separately may be configured to provide a command containing identifiable navigation ID favorable stop order for the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and then, when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, the stop order advantageous to the player. By setting the process to set a command that can identify the command, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to execute the push order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is performed, After the winning combination to be stopped is determined, every time the pressing order command setting process is performed, a pressing order command capable of specifying a stopping order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination is determined may be transmitted at least once when the winning combination is determined. The configuration may be such that the push order command setting process is not executed after the push order command that can specify the stop order advantageous to the user is transmitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a load related to transmission of a push order command by the main control unit 41.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a push order command setting process when an internal lottery is performed and a stop operation is performed on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in a state in which navigation notification is performed. However, in a state where navigation notification is performed, the push order command setting process may be executed only when an internal lottery is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a load related to transmission of a push order command by the main control unit 41 in a state where navigation notification is performed.

  When the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs an internal lottery, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning number set. The internal winning flag is set, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc. are performed, and the winning status of the special role is determined as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A first internal winning command that can be specified and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of the general role are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The winning number when the notification target combination is won as an internal winning result is a predetermined numerical range (push order replay (RT2 transition replay as the notification target combination) -6, RT1 transition replays 1-6) have a winning number of 2-14, and a pushing order bell (pushing order bell 1-6) has a winning number of 22-27). In the internal winning command setting process, the winning number set in the RAM 41c is in the predetermined numerical range (2 to 14, 22-27), a second internal winning command is set that can specify that the player has been notified, but cannot specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player, and sets the set second internal winning command. Since it is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, regardless of whether or not the AT is controlled on the main control unit 41 side, there is an advantageous stop order for the player according to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command. Specific Since Rukoto is not, possible to prevent the favorable stop order is notified by the navigation effect for the player in a state in which even fraud is made to the sub-controller 91 side is not controlled to the AT.

  In addition, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 indicates that the internal lottery result is the notification target combination. Whether or not the winning number used in performing the predetermined control is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination, and therefore the second internal winning command is transmitted. Can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay, That is, the internal lottery results are assigned consecutive numbers in the first numerical range (2 to 14) as the winning numbers of the lottery target roles of RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 and RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, and the internal lottery A consecutive number in the second numerical range (22 to 27) is assigned as the winning number when the result is the push order bell, that is, the internal lottery result is the winning number of each lottery subject in the push order bells 1 to 6. Therefore, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination, the main control unit 41 determines whether the winning number is in the first numerical range or the second numerical range depending on whether the winning number is in the first numerical range. The result is push order replay Or, since it is possible to determine whether the push order bell, can be simplified processing for setting the second internal winning command in internal winning command setting process.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can be controlled to a plurality of gaming states including a first state (RT1) and a second state (RT2, RT3). The types of push order replays as notification target roles determined in the lottery are different (in this embodiment, for example, in RT1, RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are lottery target roles, while RT1 transition replay 1 to 6 6 is not a lottery target, and in RT2 and 3, RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are lottery target roles, while RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are not lottery target roles, and gaming states RT1 and RT2, 3 is different in the types of notification target roles that are the targets of internal winning), and the winning number when the internal lottery result is a push forward replay in the first state and the gaming state is the first. Internal extraction in state 2 Since the winning numbers when the result is the push order replay are all assigned to the first numerical range (2 to 14), in the internal winning command setting process, the second state also in the first state The process for determining whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order replay can be shared.

  Further, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment responds to the internal lottery result when the internal lottery result is a role other than the notification target role or in a state where it is not controlled by the AT. When the second internal winning command including the winning numbers (0 to 1, 15 to 21, 28 in the present embodiment) is set and the internal lottery result is the push order replay which is the notification target combination, When one winning number included in the numerical range (2 to 14) (2 in the present embodiment) is included and the internal lottery result is a push order bell that is a notification target role, the second numerical range (22 to 27) ), A second internal winning command including one winning number (22 in the present embodiment) is included, so that the internal lottery result is a notification target role in a state where it is not controlled by the AT. Is also subject to notification Since the second internal winning command including the winning number corresponding to the internal lottery result is transmitted even if the internal lottery is out of or no, the second internal winning regardless of whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target role Processing to create and send commands can be shared.

  In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines whether the notification target combination is used when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. Although it is possible to specify that it has been won, it is configured to set the second internal winning command related to the general role so that it is not possible to specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player, but when it is not controlled by the AT When the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination, the fact that the notification target combination has been won can be specified, but the second internal winning related to the general combination so that the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified While the command is set and the state is controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the winning number corresponding to the type of the notified notification target combination, for example, the push order By setting the second internal winning command including the winning number “27” when the winning number “8” is won when the RT1 transition replay 1 is won as the lei, and when the pushing order bell 6 is won as the pushing order bell, When the state is controlled by the AT, a configuration in which a second internal winning command that can specify the type of the winning notification target role is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 may be adopted. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, it is possible to specify a stop order advantageous for the player according to the type of the role to be notified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. The control unit 91 can notify the stop order advantageous for the player by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery subject in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. An effect according to the type of winning combination included in the game, for example, when the RT1 transition replay 1 is elected, an effect suggesting the possibility that the normal regame included in the RT1 transition replay 1 will win Can do.

  Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the push order command setting process and transmit the push order command, and is controlled by the AT by adopting such a configuration. In the state, from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, it is possible to specify the stop order advantageous for the player according to the type of the role to be notified, and the sub-control unit 91 side sets the stop order advantageous for the player. While being able to notify by a navigation effect, the load concerning transmission of the push order command by the main control part 41 can be reduced.

  The winning number for the push order replay and the winning number for the push order bell need only be set in a continuous numerical range, and the first numerical range in which the winning number for the push order replay is set and the push order. The second numerical value range in which the winning number of the bell is set may be continuous. Even in such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination, and the winning number used when performing predetermined control is the notification target combination. Since the determination can be made based on whether or not the value is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the process, the process for transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, 1 to 28 are assigned as the winning numbers for the general combination, and the winning numbers for the push order replay that is the notification target combination are continuously set in the first numerical range (2 to 14). The winning number of the push order bell that is the notification target combination is continuously set in the second numerical range (22 to 27), and the winning numbers of the non-notification target combination are the first numerical range and the second numerical range. However, it may be configured such that the winning numbers of all the non-notification target roles are continuously set in the third numerical value range. By adopting such a configuration, whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the second internal winning command, and determine whether the winning number assigned to the non-notifying subject combination is within a predetermined numerical range. The processing to be performed can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, in the internal winning command setting process, regardless of the gaming state, the same type of notification target role group (in this embodiment, push order replay group, push order bell The same winning number for transmission is set for each group (in this embodiment, “2” for the push-order replay group and “22” for the push-bell group uniformly). The second internal winning command including the credit winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, the group of notification target roles to which the same transmission winning number is set is at least Regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target role, it can be specified that the notification target role is won, but the stop order advantageous to the player is specified. For a group of the same type of notification target combination that is a lottery target in one game state, a plurality of combinations that are advantageous to the player are included in each group. It is good also as a structure which divides | segments into a group and sets the different winning number for transmission for every divided group. As a result, it is possible to specify on the sub-control unit 91 side whether the notification target combination belonging to any one of the plurality of groups has been won, and to execute an effect corresponding to the specified group.

  Next, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R performed by the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the present embodiment are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4) provided correspondingly. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are configured by a hybrid type stepping motor that makes one round in a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335), and are based on phase signals output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on control by the main control unit 41. The excitation states of the respective excitation phases (four phases φ1 to φ4 in this embodiment) in the stepping motor are rotated by switching between excitation and non-excitation in a predetermined order.

  The main control unit 41 sets the number of steps when the reel reference position is detected by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R provided on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as 0, and rotates the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. To control. In the above-described main processing, an excitation pattern for rotating the reel in a predetermined manner is set, and in the above-described timer interrupt processing (main), the excitation pattern and the number of steps from the reel reference position are specified. A control signal indicating the excitation state of each excitation phase of the stepping motor is output to the motor drive circuit 45, and the phase signal indicating the excitation state based on the control signal is output by the motor drive circuit 45 to each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R. To output. Thereby, in each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, the excitation state of the excitation phase of the reel motor is switched based on the phase signal and controlled to a predetermined rotation mode, and each reel 2L, 2C corresponding to the reel motor is controlled. 2R controls the rotation.

  The excitation pattern of the reel motor set by the main process by the main control unit 41 is not directly related to the game excitation pattern group for controlling the rotation of the reel according to the game progress status and the game progress status. For example, a non-game excitation pattern group for performing an effect using a reel is included, and these excitation patterns are predetermined in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Among the excitation patterns of the reel motor, the game excitation pattern group includes a start pattern for starting rotation of the reel in a stopped state and accelerating to a predetermined constant speed state, and a predetermined constant speed state. A constant speed pattern for continuing to rotate the reel accelerated to a constant speed state and a stop pattern for stopping the reel rotating at a predetermined constant speed state with a predetermined number of steps.

  In each excitation pattern, the excitation state (excitation, non-excitation) of each excitation phase of the reel motor is determined for each number of steps from the reference position of the reel. By switching to the excitation state determined in the order of the numbers, the rotation of the reels can be controlled in a predetermined rotation mode, and the main control unit 41 performs the reel motor for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. After the start pattern is set as the excitation pattern, the excitation pattern can be switched to a constant speed pattern to start rotation of the reel in a stopped state and perform start control to accelerate to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Constant speed rotation control that maintains the rotation of the reel at a constant speed is performed by repeatedly setting a constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern of the reel motor. It is possible to stop the reel at a predetermined stop position according to the timing when the stop switch is operated by switching the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the stop pattern at a predetermined timing for the reel where the stop switch is operated. It is possible to perform rotation stop control.

  Further, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is updated corresponding to the number of steps for exciting the reel motor, and is initialized every time the reel reference position is detected, so that each reel 2L, 2C, A step number counter for counting the number of steps after the reel reference position is detected for 2R is provided, and the value of the step number counter for the rotating reel is set to a predetermined number of steps (at least one revolution of the reel). Therefore, the main control unit 41 determines that a rotation abnormality has occurred for the reel, and the number of steps set is larger than the 336 steps required for the purpose. Reset the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the start pattern, and start the excitation of the reel motor from the beginning of the start pattern. Changes state, it is possible to restart the rotation of the reel.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), the main control unit 41 sets a start pattern as an excitation pattern for each of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R as the game start operation is performed. The rotation of each reel is started by changing the excitation state of each excitation phase of each reel motor in the stopped state based on the start pattern. Further, when setting the start pattern as the excitation pattern, the step number counter is initialized and the step number counting is started. Then, by switching the excitation pattern from the start pattern to the constant speed pattern, the rotation of the reel is controlled to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Thereafter, when the reel is rotating normally, the reel reference position is detected by at least one turn of the reel before the step counter reaches the predetermined step number (for example, 400 steps). It will be. Then, for all the reels that are rotating, the activation condition for enabling the acceptance of the stopping operation of the rotating reels by switching the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the constant speed pattern and detecting the reel reference position is It is determined that it has been established. Along with the establishment of this validation condition, the main control unit 41 validates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel, and in this state, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated, so that the corresponding reel The stop control is effectively received and the stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel is started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 37B, the main control unit 41 starts the rotation of each of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32 in the stopped state, and then sets the reel reference position for at least one of the reels. If the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps) without being detected, that is, the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected is required for the reel to make one turn. When the number of steps is exceeded, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, restart control is performed, and for the corresponding reel, the excitation pattern of the reel motor is set as the start pattern again, The rotation is restarted by changing the excitation state of the reel motor from the beginning of the start pattern. When performing restart control, a step number counter is initialized. Thereafter, when the reel is normally rotated, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined step number (for example, 400 steps). Then, for all the rotating reels, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected, so that the condition for enabling the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the main controller 41 Validates the acceptance of the rotating reel stop operation when the validation condition is satisfied.

  As shown in FIG. 38, for example, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, an instantaneous power failure occurs and an extremely short period of time occurs. The rotation control of the reel is stopped, the reel is caught or slipped, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step number counter is set to a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 Step), that is, when the number of steps since the previous reel reference position was detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the main control unit 41 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel. Judgment is made and the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels. For reels for which the reel reference position has not been detected and it has been determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state, the step number counter is initialized and restart control is performed, and the reel motor is excited again from the beginning of the start pattern. By changing the state, the rotation of the reel is restarted. After that, when the reel rotates normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step counter reaches the predetermined number of steps after starting the change of the excitation state of the reel motor again by the start pattern. It will be. Then, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels, so that the conditions for enabling the reel stop operation are satisfied, and the main control unit No. 41 validates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel when the validation condition is satisfied.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 39, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, a momentary power failure occurs and an extremely short time is reached. The rotation control of the reel is stopped, the reel is caught or slipped, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step number counter is set to a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 If the step) is exceeded, the main control unit 41 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, invalidates the acceptance of the stop operation for all reels, and does not detect the reel reference position. For step 1, the step number counter is initialized and restart control is performed. If the reel that has been subjected to the restart control does not rotate normally and the step number counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the step number counter is initialized again and the restart control is repeated. Thereafter, when the reel reference position is not detected before the step number counter reaches the predetermined number of steps even though the reel is continuously controlled for a maximum of three times for the reel, All reels that are rotating are stopped, and error control for controlling to an error state is started to disable the progress of the game.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment includes a backup storage area capable of holding the stored contents when power is supplied from the backup power source. The power interruption is detected based on the output of the power interruption detection circuit 48. If detected, the control state of the main control unit 41 is stored in the backup storage area, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control state when the power interruption is detected is restored. Can be done. When at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed, and when power interruption is detected in a state in which the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled for the reel, the control state of each reel is Data including the rotation state, the excitation pattern of each reel motor, and the like is stored in the backup storage area.

  When the main control unit 41 recovers from the power interruption by restarting the power supply to the slot machine 1, the power interruption is detected based on the control state stored in the backup storage area. For the reels that were rotating at the time, the excitation pattern at the time when the power interruption was detected was set as the excitation pattern of the reel motor. Regardless of the state before disconnection, it returns as an invalid state. After that, various controls are performed based on the control state reset at the time of return.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), the main control unit 41 controls at least one of the reels to a constant speed rotation, and the power is supplied in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. When a break occurs and the power is restored from the power interruption, the constant speed pattern is set as the excitation pattern at the time of the power interruption, but the stop operation is returned in an invalid state. Thereafter, by starting the rotation control of the reel, the excitation state of the corresponding reel motor is changed based on the constant speed pattern which is the excitation pattern set at the time of return. As a result, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined step number (for example, 400 steps) for the rotating reel. The validation condition for accepting the stop operation is established. Then, when the conditions for enabling the acceptance of the stop operation are satisfied for all the rotating reels, the acceptance of the stop operation is validated for all the rotating reels. When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in this state, the stop operation is effectively received and the corresponding reels are controlled to stop.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40B, the reel rotation control is started by the constant speed pattern set at the time of return from the power interruption, but the reel motor torque is insufficient and the reel does not rotate normally. In this case, the reel reference position is not detected for the reel, and the step number counter exceeds the predetermined number of steps. In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, the step number counter is initialized and the restart control is performed for the reel, and the excitation pattern of the reel motor is changed to the start pattern. The rotation of the reel is restarted by changing the excitation state of the reel motor from the beginning of the starting pattern. After that, when the restart control is performed, the reel is normally rotated, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern for all the rotating reels, and the stop operation is performed by detecting the reel reference position. Is satisfied, the acceptance of the stop operation of all the rotating reels is validated. On the other hand, if the reels do not rotate normally and the restart control is continuously performed a maximum of 3 times, but the reels do not rotate normally, all the rotating reels are stopped and an error occurs. Error control to control the state is started, and the progress of the game is disabled.

  In addition, when the plurality of reels are rotating, the main control unit 41 detects the reel reference position for the other reels when the step number counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps for any one of the reels. Regardless of whether or not the step number counter has exceeded a predetermined number of steps, the reels are controlled to be sequentially restarted from the reel. For example, for a plurality of reels, the reels are rotated at different timings. Even when an abnormality occurs in the state, the reels are sequentially restarted in order from the reel that has been previously determined to be abnormal in the rotation state without waiting for the reel to be restarted in which the abnormality in the rotation state is determined later.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment starts the rotation of the reel and then detects the reel reference position and the constant speed rotation for all the rotating reels, and the stop operation validation condition is satisfied. In this state, the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled for all the rotating reels, while the reel reference position is detected for at least one of the reels after the rotation of the reels is started. If the number of steps after the start of rotation specified based on the step number counter or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps exceeding one reel, the reel It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the.

  In such a configuration, if an abnormality occurs even once in the rotation state of the reel, if it is determined that the rotation of the reel is abnormal and control is made to an error state to disable the progress of the game, the reel is temporarily Even in a situation where the rotation of the game is delayed and then the reel can be rotated normally, the progress of the game will be disabled, which will hinder the smooth progress of the game. There is.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, after the reel rotation is started, the reel reference position is detected for all the reels that are rotating, and it is shifted to constant speed rotation. In the established situation, when a reel rotation abnormality is determined, restart control is performed to restart the reel by changing the excitation state of the reel motor again by the start pattern that is the excitation pattern at the time of reel start. Each time it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, the progress of the game is not disabled and the game can proceed smoothly.

  In addition, since the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated after the restart control is performed until the stop operation enabling condition is satisfied after the restart control is performed, the reel is rotated in a situation where the rotation of the reel is not normal. It is possible to prevent the stop control from being executed.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the power interruption is caused and the power supply is stopped after the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the control state before the power interruption is resumed when the power supply is resumed and the power supply is restored. From now on, control to change the excitation state of the reel motor will be resumed. After that, when normal rotation is identified by detecting the reel reference position, the acceptance of the stop operation is validated from that time. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure or the like occurs, as long as normal rotation is maintained for the rotating reel, the game can proceed immediately after the power supply is resumed.

  In addition, when the power supply is stopped after the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, when the power supply is resumed, there is not enough torque to rotate the reel, and the reel does not rotate. Even if it is determined, restart control is performed for the reel, and the progress of the game is not immediately disabled. Therefore, the game can be smoothly advanced.

  Further, in such a case, after the power supply is resumed, it is determined that the reel rotation is abnormal and restart control is performed. During the period until the validation condition is satisfied by shifting to constant speed rotation, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated. It is possible to prevent the stop control from being executed.

  In this embodiment, the reel reference position is detected, and the rotation of the reel shifts to the constant speed rotation, so that it is determined that the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, and the reel is operated at the constant speed. Although the rotation has not been reached, it is possible to prevent the stop control of the rotating reel from being executed by the stop operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the restart control that changes the excitation state of the reel motor with the excitation pattern at the start, the restart control is performed when the reel reference position is not detected and the validation condition for the stop operation is not satisfied. Is repeated and the restart control is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), but if the enabling condition for the stop operation is not satisfied, the game is disabled by controlling to an error state. If the reel does not rotate normally even by restart control, that is, if the restart control does not solve the problem, the game can be disabled.

  Further, in this embodiment, when rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels in a state where the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the restart control is sequentially performed from the reels for which rotation abnormality is determined. Thus, even when rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels, each reel can be rotated normally at the earliest possible stage.

  In this embodiment, when the rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels in a state where the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 sequentially restarts the reels from which the rotation abnormality has been determined. For example, when a rotation abnormality of one of the reels is determined, the start control is repeated until a period during which the rotation abnormality of the remaining reels can be determined (a period corresponding to a predetermined number of steps) has elapsed. The configuration for delaying the start control, i.e., when the rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels in a state where the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the reel restart control in which the rotation abnormality is determined earliest, A configuration may be adopted in which delay is delayed until the restart control of the reel whose rotation abnormality has been determined the latest. If the rotation abnormality is judged by grayed also, it is possible to restart the plurality of reels rotation abnormality is judged at the same timing, the better is restarted when the appearance.

  In this embodiment, the reel reference position is not detected, and the number of steps after the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps (400 steps) exceeding one reel. The reel rotation abnormality is specified, but the predetermined number of steps is larger than the number of steps required for one revolution of the reel, that is, the reel reference position is detected when the reel is rotating normally. Any value larger than the number of steps required to be performed is sufficient.

  In this embodiment, the reel reference position is not detected, and when the number of steps after the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the reel is restarted. When the stop operation validation condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the reel rotation abnormality is determined to be invalid and the game is disabled. However, the stop operation validation condition is established. If not, if the control for restarting the reel is performed at least once, it is possible to prevent the game from being frequently disabled.

  In this embodiment, the reel reference position is detected after starting rotation, and the acceptance of the stop operation is validated by shifting to constant speed rotation, but at least the reel reference position is detected. Any configuration may be used as long as the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the shift to the constant speed rotation is made based on whether or not the number of steps from the start of the reel rotation is equal to or greater than the number of steps necessary to shift to the constant speed rotation. However, it is determined whether or not the rotation has shifted to the constant speed rotation by determining whether or not the constant speed is satisfied based on the number of steps or time until the next reel reference position is detected after the reel reference position is detected. It is good also as a structure to determine.

  Next, control related to navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment using the game auxiliary display 12 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the game auxiliary indicator 12 includes two indicators 12L and 12R that can turn on / off each of the first to eighth segments, and can display each segment in red. It is a vessel. Each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is driven by the LED drive circuit 47 based on the lighting mode data stored in a predetermined output buffer provided on the game control board 40, so that a predetermined lighting mode is obtained. It is controlled to be turned on or off. In addition, as the game auxiliary display 12, a display or a liquid crystal display capable of lighting each segment in any color such as white, pink, yellow, orange, red, green, blue, or a plurality of colors is provided. It may be used.

  The main control unit 41 can set the navigation notification display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to display the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and perform the navigation notification. . Further, by setting the payout number display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer, it is possible to perform the payout number notification for displaying the number of medals awarded when the winning is generated on the game auxiliary display 12. By setting error display data as lighting mode data in the buffer, it is possible to perform error notification in which an error code indicating the content is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 when an error occurs.

  In a predetermined area of the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, lighting mode data for individually displaying numbers and predetermined alphabetic characters on one display constituting the game auxiliary display 12, and predetermined symbols (this implementation) In the example, lighting mode data for displaying “.”) Stores a lighting mode data table defined for each content to be displayed. In the lighting mode data table, numbers are assigned in advance for each lighting mode data, and one number is set to correspond to one lighting mode data. When the main control unit 41 sets the lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12, the main control unit 41 sets the display device corresponding to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c provided corresponding to the display devices 12L and 12R. By setting the number corresponding to the display content to be displayed and executing the display data storage process, the display 12L, 12R is made to display the predetermined content by the lighting mode data corresponding to the number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is possible. Thereby, in the case of performing the navigation notification, the notification of the number of payouts, or the error notification, by designating the number corresponding to the lighting mode data stored in the lighting mode data table, It is possible to display predetermined display contents on the respective indicators 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary indicator 12 using the common lighting mode data.

  In the display data storage process, the number of a predetermined area in the RAM 41c is referred to, lighting mode data corresponding to the number is specified from the lighting mode data table, and the specified lighting mode data is displayed as navigation notification display data, payout number. Display data and error display data are stored in an output buffer of a display corresponding to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Thereby, based on the lighting mode data stored in the output buffer, each segment of the corresponding display device is driven by the LED drive circuit 47, whereby a predetermined display content is displayed. Note that the main control unit 41 sets data indicating the lighting mode (lit or extinguished) of each segment of the display (8-bit data in which each bit indicates the lighting mode, for example, “00000001” (“1” is turned on). Display the lighting mode data without executing the display data storage process by storing the data that only the one segment corresponding to the rightmost bit is lit) in the output buffer of the corresponding display. It is also possible to display the indicator on the basis of the lighting mode data directly stored in the output buffer of the indicator, and even if the lighting mode is not set in the lighting mode data table, the indicators 12L and 12R It can be displayed.

  When the internal lottery is performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 refers to the result of the internal lottery set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and any of the special roles (BB1 to RB) is selected. And whether or not the conditions for performing the navigation notification of the predetermined special role (in this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 5 games) is established after the special role is won) are satisfied. If the conditions for executing the special role navigation notification are satisfied, a flag indicating that the navigation notification is to be performed when the conditions for executing the special role navigation notification are satisfied is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The above-described push order command setting process is performed. The flag is referred to in the push order command setting process, and is the timing after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is established, and at the time when the winning special role can be won, that is, the internal When the result of the lottery is lost, the navigation number (10 to 13) that suggests the symbols that constitute the winning special combination is set as the transmission navigation number.

  Then, after the push order command setting process is completed, the lighting mode data setting process of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed. In the setting process of the lighting mode data of the game auxiliary indicator 12, when the special role is not won or the execution condition is not satisfied, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set by the push order command transmission process described above. Referring to the transmission navigation numbers ("0" to "9") that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification, the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number is set in the output buffer. On the other hand, when the special role is elected and the execution condition is satisfied, it is set by the push order command transmission process, and a predetermined symbol suggested by the navigation notification (in this embodiment, “blue 7 ”“ Red 7 ”,“ White 7 ”and“ BAR ”symbols) are referred to, and the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number is selected with reference to the transmission navigation numbers (“ 10 ”to“ 13 ”). To set the output buffer.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), when setting the navigation notification display data, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation notification display when the navigation number is the standard push order number “0” and no navigation notification is performed. By setting the initial value of the output buffer as data, that is, by initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and setting all the first to eighth segments of each display 12L, 12R to the off state, The display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed. In addition, the navigation number is one of the navigation numbers “1” to “9” other than the standard push order, and when performing the navigation notification, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on so that the number of the navigation number is displayed. In addition, the navigation notification display data in which the eighth segment of the display 12R is turned on and the other segments are turned off is set in the output buffer so that the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. To control. In addition, when a special role is won and the implementation conditions are met, if navigation notification display data including a navigation number that suggests a symbol corresponding to the special role is selected, the number of that navigation number The navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer so that each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on, the eighth segment of the display 12R is turned on, and the other segments are turned off. Thus, control is performed so that the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

  Thus, the segment that is lit for each stop order to be notified (left middle right, left / right middle, middle left / right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop). As the navigation combination is different, the navigation number is displayed in an identifiable manner based on the combination of segments that are lit. As a navigation notification, the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is added. Notification can be made using the display 12. In addition, if the special role is elected and the implementation conditions are met, the navigation number that suggests a symbol (blue 7, red 7, white 7, BAR) according to the elected special role ("10" to "13") are displayed so as to be recognizable, so that a predetermined symbol is suggested as a timing of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The timing of possible stop operations can be notified using the game auxiliary display 12. The main control unit 41 controls the eighth seg main of the display 12R together with the navigation number to turn on when performing the navigation notification, while turning off the eighth seg main of the display 12R when not performing the navigation notification. With this control, it can be recognized from the lighting state of the game auxiliary display 12 whether or not the navigation notification is being executed.

  In the navigation notification of the present embodiment, the combination of segments corresponding to the navigation number is lit so that the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is the navigation number, but the game auxiliary display 12 is used as the navigation notification. The display mode may be a display mode that directly indicates the stop order (for example, Modification 1 of FIG. 43), and is not a recall of the stop order directly, but is a lit segment It is difficult to immediately identify the stop order from the combination of the above, and a display mode (for example, Modification 2 of FIG. 43) that cannot be easily identified without a correspondence table or the like may be used.

  Specifically, as shown as Modification 1 in FIG. 43, for example, the reel number of the left reel 2L is “1”, the reel number of the middle reel 2C is “2”, and the reel number of the right reel 2R is “3”. By displaying the first stop reel number on one display 12L of the two game auxiliary indicators 12, and displaying the second stop reel number on the other indicator 12R (game auxiliary indicator) 12 indicates, for example, that the stop order is left and right in the middle), and the stop order is directly suggested as navigation notification, and the symbol of blue 7 is “b7”, red By displaying “7” as the symbol of “7”, “S7” as the symbol of white 7, and “br” as the symbol of BAR, these “b7”, “r7”, “S7” and “br” are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. , Blue 7, red 7, white 7, and BAR It is possible to directly indicating timing.

  In addition, as shown as Modification 2 in FIG. 43, a combination of segments in which it is difficult to immediately identify the stop order in advance in the stop order (for example, as a combination of segments suggesting the stop order of left middle right, It is difficult to immediately identify the stop order by allocating the second segment of 12L, the fourth and sixth segment combinations of the display 12R, etc., and lighting the corresponding segment, but use a correspondence table or the like The order of stoppage can be suggested by the display mode that can be identified.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not any winning combination has occurred when the game is progressed and all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and a payout is made. If any winning combination (small role) has occurred, the number of medals to be paid out when the winning is generated is set in the output buffer as the payout number display data and is paid out to the game auxiliary display 12. The number of medals to be displayed is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the payout number display data is set in the output buffer, each segment of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is turned on so that the payout number of medals is displayed. By setting the payout number display data for turning off other segments including the segment in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the payout number of medals. For example, when eight medals are paid out, the first to seventh segments of the display 12R are turned on, while the first to eighth segments of the display 12L and the eighth segment of the display 12R are turned off. Thereby, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the eighth segment of the display 12R is controlled to be turned off, so that the lighting mode and the number of medals paid out in the navigation notification as described above. It becomes a lighting mode different from the lighting mode in the notification, so that it is not mistaken whether navigation notification is performed on the game auxiliary display 12 or the number of medals to be paid out is notified. Yes.

  When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects an error while the game is in progress, an error code (E1 to E8, see FIG. 44) predetermined according to the type of the error is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When a predetermined error display condition to be described later is satisfied (in this embodiment, when an error is detected during the reel rotation control, all reels are stopped and the reel rotation control is in progress. When an error is detected at other times, the error is detected when the error is detected), and error display data including the error code set in the RAM 41c is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12.

  As shown in FIG. 44, when setting the error display data, the main control unit 41 turns on each segment of the game auxiliary indicator 12 so as to display the letters and numbers of the error code, and sets the other segments. By setting the error display data for turning off the LED in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display an error code that can identify the type of error detected. Then, when a predetermined error cancellation condition (see FIG. 44) that is set in advance is satisfied, the output buffer is initialized and the display of the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 is ended. In the error display data, the first, second, fourth, fifth, and seventh segments of the display 12L are turned on to display the letter “E” and correspond to the number of the error code among the segments of the display 12R. While the segment is turned on, the other segments of the indicators 12L and 12R are turned off. Thereby, when displaying an error code on the game auxiliary display 12, the lighting mode is controlled so that the alphabet "E" that is not displayed is displayed on the display 12L in the navigation notification and the payout number display. Therefore, the lighting mode at the time of notifying the error code is a lighting mode different from the lighting mode at the navigation notification and the lighting mode at the notification of the number of payout medals, and is the error code notified by the game auxiliary display 12? Thus, it is possible to prevent misconception that the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals to be paid out are performed.

  Next, the timing at which the main control unit 41 switches the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 according to the progress of the game and the like will be described based on FIGS. 45 to 48.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and sets the game auxiliary display when one or more bets are set to start the game. All the segments of the device 12 are turned off and controlled to be hidden. Then, a start operation is performed in a state where the specified number of bets is set, thereby starting rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game. At this time, the navigation number “0” in the standard push order is set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When no navigation notification is performed, all segments of the game auxiliary display 12 are turned off. maintain. Then, after the third stop operation is performed, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if any winning of any small role has occurred, the number of medals to be paid out by winning Is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as payout number display data, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Then, by setting a bet number of 1 or more to start the next game, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized again, and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. Thereby, in a game that does not perform navigation notification, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed over a period from when a bet number of 1 or more is set to when a payout of medals is started by winning. When all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started, a bet number of 1 or more is set or a waiting condition (no operation for a certain period of time, settlement operation is performed) In the period from the establishment to the standby state, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the number of medals as a payout number display. When the third stop operation is performed and all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if the re-game player has won a prize and no win has occurred, the game assistance By not setting the number-of-payout display data in the output buffer of the display device 12, one or more bets are set in order to keep the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 hidden and start one game. The lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed over a period from time until the time when the bet amount is set to start the next game, that is, over all the periods in one game.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), when performing the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 performs the start operation in a state where the specified number of bets is set, and then performs the reel 2L relating to the game. When starting the rotation control of 2C, 2R, with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, one of the navigation numbers “1” to “9” is set as the transmission navigation number by the above-described push order command transmission processing. If the navigation conditions for special role navigation notification are satisfied and any of navigation numbers “10” to “13” is set as the transmission navigation number, the corresponding navigation number is The navigation notification display data to be displayed is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, the stop switch for the third stop is operated, and when the stop switch is released, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized and the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. And then wait for a predetermined waiting period. Then, after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a prize for any small role has occurred. If a prize for a small role has occurred, the number of medals to be paid out by winning is determined. The payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, in a game that performs navigation notification, the game auxiliary indicator 12 is displayed over a period from when the reel starts rotating with the start of the game until when the stop switch of the third stop operation is released. Control is performed so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as navigation notification. When the output buffer is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is once controlled to be non-displayed, and then all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started. From then on, control is performed so that the number of medals is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as a payout number display over a period from when one or more bets are set.

  Further, as described above (see FIG. 38), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotating state of the rotating reels, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels, and the reels that are determined to be abnormal are restarted. Perform restart control. Thereafter, when all the rotating reels are normally rotated, the acceptance of the stop operation is re-enabled. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the case of performing the navigation notification, when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started, the navigation notification is given to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. When the display data is set and then the third stop stop switch is released, the output buffer is initialized. As a result, in the case of performing the navigation notification, it is effective to accept the stop operation during the period from when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started to when the third stop stop switch is released. The navigation number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is continued regardless of whether it is disabled or disabled.

  As shown in FIG. 45B, the main control unit 41 transmits the above-described push order command to the sub-control unit 91 when a game start operation is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and when the navigation notification is specified based on the navigation number, it is specified based on the navigation number. A navigation effect suggesting an advantageous operation mode is executed. In the navigation effect, for example, a number indicating the stop order based on the navigation number is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, or a stop operation based on the navigation number is performed. An image indicating timing (for example, an image of “red 7” or the like) is displayed on the display area 51 a of the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest an advantageous operation mode.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to start the navigation effect when the push order command is received when the navigation effect is performed. For example, a reel acceleration information command indicating that rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is to be started at the start of the game is received as long as the stop operation of the stop switch is enabled on the control unit 41 side. Even if the timing or the timing within the period after receiving the acceleration completion command indicating that the control for accelerating the reel to the predetermined constant speed rotation is completed with the start of the game after receiving the push order command, etc. good. In particular, when the stop operation is validated, the navigation notification is performed by starting the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side and starting the navigation effect on the sub control unit 91 side. Even if it is in the state, since the navigation notification and the navigation effect do not suggest that the role to be notified is suggested during the period from when the start operation is performed until when the stop operation is enabled, It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the role won in the lottery. In particular, after starting the rotation of the reel related to the game, the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side is started and the navigation effect on the sub control unit 91 side is started. In the period from when the start operation is performed until the reel rotation control for the game is started, the main control unit 41 controls the freeze state to delay the progress of the game, and the reel effect using the reel in the freeze state In the period from when the start operation is performed until the reel rotation control for the game is started, that is, during the period in which the control is set to the freeze state, the target of notification by the navigation notification and the navigation effect. Since winning of a role is not suggested, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the winning role in the internal lottery over the period Kill.

  In addition, after starting the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment ends the navigation notification when the stop switch for the third stop operation is released, and sends a game end command to the sub-control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 can end the navigation effect when the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side is ended based on the reception of the game end command. The navigation effect only needs to be performed when the game result changes at least according to the stop order. For example, the stop switch in the stop order other than the stop order suggested by the navigation notification and the navigation effect is operated. If it is determined that the role to be notified will not win, or if it is determined that only one role will win by performing the first stop operation or the second stop operation, etc. Before the navigation notification is terminated by-in control unit 41 side, it may be configured such that the navigation performance is terminated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the navigation effect from being continued even after the game result is confirmed.

  Even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can hold the stored content by supplying power from the backup power source. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power interruption is detected based on the output of the power interruption detection circuit 48, the control state in the main control unit 41 set in the RAM 41c is changed to the power interruption. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started after that, the control is started in the control state when the power interruption is detected. Can be done.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the main control unit 41 controls the rotation of at least one reel as the game progresses and performs navigation notification to the game auxiliary display 12, the power interruption occurs. When detected, the control related to the power interruption is performed, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-display, and the rotation control is performed. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, the control state including the excitation pattern of the reel motor of the reel, the number of steps of excitation control, the navigation number, and the like can be restored with the contents when the power interruption is detected. Perform the power interruption process as possible.

  After that, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the control state of the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power interruption, the power is stored in the RAM 41c when the power interruption is detected. The control state before power interruption is restored based on the control state that has been interrupted, but the acceptance state of the stop operation by all stop switches in the control state is changed to invalid and set. As a result, the main control unit 41 returns in a state where reception of stop operations by all stop switches is invalidated.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the control state to the state before the power interruption, the navigation number, the excitation pattern of the reel motor of each reel, and the number of steps are stored in the RAM 41c when the power interruption is detected. It returns with what was done. When returning, the control state on the main control unit 41 side including the return command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power interruption and the push order command that can specify the navigation number is displayed. Various identifiable commands are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. After that, the same control as that at the start of the above-mentioned game is executed, and the control for advancing the game based on the control state set in the RAM 41c is performed, so that the navigation number set in the RAM 41c is used. Then, the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to resume, and then the reel motor excitation pattern set in the RAM 41c, that is, Based on the constant speed pattern, the reel motor whose rotation was controlled before power interruption is excited from the number of steps of the excitation pattern when power interruption is detected, and the corresponding reel is again rotated at a predetermined constant speed. When the reel is controlled to rotate and the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed, the stop operation of the corresponding reel is accepted by the stop switch. Control is performed to enable the.

  At this time, in the control of rotating the corresponding reel again at a predetermined constant speed rotation, the rotation control of the corresponding reel motor is performed based on the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern set when the power interruption is detected. In such a case, as described above (see FIGS. 40A and 40B), the corresponding reel is normally rotated according to the state of the corresponding reel (rotated state or stopped state). In some cases, there is a case where the reel does not rotate normally. In the case where the reel does not rotate normally, restart control is performed to rotate the corresponding reel normally.

  When the reel is rotated normally and when it is rotated normally by restart control, when the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed, the corresponding reel Enables acceptance of stop operation by the stop switch. Thereafter, the control waits until the stop switch whose reception is enabled is operated, and performs control to stop the corresponding reel when the stop switch is operated.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 receives the return order command after returning from the power interruption, and then receives the press order command. Based on the navigation number specified by the press order command, the main control unit 91 When it is determined that the navigation notification is performed on the 41 side, the navigation effect that can specify the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player based on the navigation number is resumed. Thereafter, the effect is controlled based on various commands received in accordance with the progress of the game. As a result, the main control unit 41 recovers from the power interruption, transmits a push order command, etc., then restarts the rotation control of the reels, and the corresponding reels are rotated at a constant speed. The sub-control unit 91 resumes the navigation effect when receiving the push order command after returning from the power interruption, so that the sub-control unit 91 performs the main control unit 41. When the stop operation is validated on the side, it is possible to make a state in which a navigation effect is already being performed.

  As described above, when the power interruption is detected, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12 and controls the gaming auxiliary display 12 to be hidden. In the period from when the power is detected until the power supply to the slot machine 1 is completely stopped, the navigation number by navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When power interruption is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the main control unit 41 returns, the navigation notification is displayed on the output buffer. Since the control is performed so that the data is reset, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 over a period from when the power supply is resumed until when the main control unit 41 returns. It is like that.

  Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the main control unit 41 returns, the main control unit 41 resets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and then When the reel that has been controlled for rotation when power interruption is detected is rotated again at a predetermined constant speed, and the corresponding reel is rotated at a constant speed, the stop operation by the stop switch of the reel is performed. Since the control is made to enable the acceptance of the game machine, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, the game auxiliary display device 12 starts displaying the navigation number by the navigation notification, and then stops by the stop switch. The acceptance of the operation is validated, and the acceptance of the stop operation is validated in the state where the navigation number is already displayed.

  Further, the main control unit 41 detects a power interruption when performing the rotation control of the reel, and thereafter, when returning from the power interruption, the main control unit 41 executes a process common to that at the start of the game and is set at the time of the return. The progress of the game is controlled based on the control state.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the main control unit 41 that controls the game and the sub control unit 91 that controls the effect. The main control unit 41 is controlled by the main control unit 41 side. The game auxiliary display 12 is capable of performing navigation notification for notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player.

  In such a configuration, when a power interruption occurs in the state where the navigation notification is performed on the game auxiliary indicator 12, the navigation notification is performed even after the power interruption is restored. If the configuration is such that the stop operation is validated before the navigation notification returns, the stop operation may be performed in an operation mode different from the advantageous operation mode to be notified.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform navigation notification for notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41 side. Yes, after the reel rotation control is started at the start of the game, the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted in a state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied In addition, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power supply is resumed in the state where the navigation notification is being performed, in a period from when the power supply is resumed until a predetermined activation condition is satisfied. , Stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is not accepted, navigation notification is resumed on the game auxiliary display 12, and after a predetermined enabling condition is satisfied, Since the stop operation by the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is received, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped in a state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, the power supply is restarted and then enabled. The stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is not accepted in the period until the condition is satisfied, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped in a situation where it is unknown whether the rotation is normal after the power supply is resumed. Can be prevented. Further, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in a state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is being performed, the timing is earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Since the navigation notification is resumed at this time, the stop switches 8L and 8C are erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the player is notified of the advantageous operation mode by performing the navigation notification. , 8R can be prevented from being operated.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment displays, as predetermined contents, the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of a small role and the error that has occurred, on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41. It is possible to display an error code indicating the content, and to display a navigation number that can identify an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player as display content different from the predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12 Therefore, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side, a new display is made by displaying the navigation number using a display means for displaying a predetermined content. Without providing means, it is possible to display the predetermined contents and the navigation number.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment resumes power supply after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in a state in which a predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is performed. Thus, when the main control unit 41 returns to the state before the power interruption, after the navigation notification is resumed, the rotation of the reel is controlled for the rotation when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. The control is resumed. After the power supply is resumed, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 in the same display mode as when the power supply is stopped regardless of the reel stop state. Thus, since the advantageous operation mode is notified, it is possible to simplify the control related to the resumption of the control for notifying the advantageous operation mode by the navigation notification.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 uses a plurality of different operation timings (“blue 7”, “red 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”) as an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player. An operation mode operated at any one of the operation timings (timing to stop by LN), and an operation mode operated in any one of the multiple operation orders (eg, left middle right, left / right middle operation order, etc.) Although it is the structure which alert | reports by navigation alerting | reporting, the structure which alert | reports the operation aspect etc. by these combination may be sufficient.

  When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment starts the reel rotation control with the start of the game, the main control unit 41 starts the navigation notification that notifies the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player, and then the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Since the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted in this state, the navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than a predetermined activation condition is satisfied after the game starts, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the operation mode has been notified.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts the navigation notification that notifies the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player when the reel rotation control is started at the start of the game, and then performs a predetermined validation. The configuration is such that the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted in a state where the condition is satisfied, but any configuration may be used as long as the navigation notification is started after the start of the game until the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, For example, the navigation notification may be started when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, or a predetermined effective state from when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The configuration may be such that navigation notification is started at any timing within the period until the activation condition is satisfied. Even in such a configuration, after the game is started, navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than a predetermined activation condition is satisfied, so that it is not known that an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is notified. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment invalidates the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when an abnormality is detected in the rotation state of the reel after a predetermined activation condition is satisfied, and again the predetermined control condition is satisfied. When the activation condition is satisfied, the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated. On the other hand, after the navigation notification is started, even when an abnormality is detected in the reel rotation state, the navigation Since the notification of the advantageous operation mode by the notification is continued, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is notified. Can be prevented.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can transmit a push order command that can specify an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player to the sub control unit 91, whereas the sub control unit 91 pushes the push order command. Using a liquid crystal display 51 that is controlled on the sub-control unit 91 side when a navigation effect that can identify an advantageous operation mode can be executed based on the command and navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side. Since it is possible to notify the advantageous operation mode, it is possible to enhance the effect of producing the advantageous operation mode.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restarts the power supply after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in a state where the validation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is performed, When the unit 41 returns to the state before the power interruption, the navigation notification is resumed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Thereafter, the reel rotation control is started, and the predetermined validation is performed. Since the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated when the condition is established, the push order command that can specify the advantageous operation mode at an earlier timing than the validation condition is established is the sub-control unit 91. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed on the sub-control unit 91 side, the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective. The navigation effect can be started before the player operates, and the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode is notified. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, power supply to the slot machine 1 is started again, so that power interruption is detected when the control state in the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before power interruption. This is a configuration for returning to the control state before the power interruption based on the control state stored in the RAM 41c, especially for reels that have been controlled for rotation before the power interruption. The motor is restored with the excitation pattern and the number of steps set. When returning from power interruption, the excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the excitation pattern at the time of power interruption, that is, the constant speed pattern and the number of steps. After the reels are controlled to resume rotation, if the reels do not rotate normally, the excitation pattern of the corresponding reel is reset to the start pattern and the rotation is restarted. The main control unit 41 is configured to perform start-up control. When the power supply is stopped and the power supply is resumed in a state where one of the reels is rotationally controlled before the power interruption, In the case of returning to this control state, the reel motor excitation pattern may be set as the start pattern for the corresponding reel.

  Specifically, the main control unit 41 selects the excitation pattern of the reel motor in the order of the start pattern, the constant speed pattern, and the stop pattern when performing normal game control. As shown in (a), a start pattern is selected on the condition that a valid start switch 7 has been operated, and the reel in a stopped state is started and accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Then, a constant speed pattern is selected and the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed. Then, in this state, a stop pattern is selected for the reel corresponding to the stop switch operated on condition that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, according to the number of sliding frames, and the stop switch is operated. The reel is stopped at the stop position corresponding to the operation of the stop switch within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms in this embodiment). After that, the main control unit 41 does not select the excitation pattern until the next game is started and maintains the reel in the stopped state, as shown in FIG. The rotation of the reel is controlled by the above, and when the reel is stopped during the start due to the power interruption, the start pattern selected at the time of the power interruption is used when returning from the power interruption. By changing the excitation state from the first step of the starting pattern, it is possible to start the reel without temporarily turning the reel into a normal state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation of the reel is controlled by a constant speed pattern before power interruption, and if the reel is stopped during the start due to power interruption, When returning, the excitation pattern is changed from the constant speed pattern that was selected at the time of power interruption to the start pattern, and the excitation state is changed from the first step of the start pattern so that the reel does not rotate normally once The reel can be started without.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), control is performed to stop the rotation of the reel by a stop pattern before power interruption, and when the reel is stopped during the control to stop by power interruption, When returning from a power interruption, using the stop pattern selected at the time of power interruption, changing the excitation state from the number of steps at the time of power interruption in that stop pattern, the stop pattern that was being executed at the time of power interruption By executing continuously, the stop pattern executed at the time of power interruption is executed to the end within a specific time (190 ms in this embodiment) except for the time during power interruption after starting before power interruption. Can do.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can detect occurrence of various game-related errors such as errors related to medal payout, medal insertion errors, and reel rotation errors in the main process and timer interrupt process (main). When a predetermined error display condition is satisfied after detecting various errors as described above, an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. The predetermined error display condition is that when various errors are detected in a state where the reel is not rotationally controlled with the game, the error is detected, and various errors are detected while the reel is rotationally controlled. The case is when all reels are stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs navigation notification by setting navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 at the start of the game as described above, and then The output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 uses the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning status when the predetermined standby period has passed since the stop switch where the 3 stop operation was performed is used as the payout number display data. And the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. In such a configuration, when the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation notification is started, the stop switch in which the third stop operation has been performed is released, and further a predetermined standby If various errors relating to the game, especially errors relating to the insertion of medals, and errors relating to the rotation of the reel are detected in the restriction period until the period elapses, the control relating to the game is continued until the above restriction period elapses. When the limit period has elapsed, an error code indicating the content of the detected error is set as error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 After starting, control to the error state.

  Thereafter, when a release condition (for example, operation of the reset switch 23 in a predetermined procedure) according to the type of the detected abnormality is satisfied, the game control is resumed from the time before the error state control is started. . By resuming the control of the game, it is determined whether the control after the third stop operation has been performed and the predetermined period has elapsed, that is, whether or not any small role winning has occurred. When a winning combination has occurred, the number of medals to be paid out by winning is set as output number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Let

  As described above, when various errors are detected in the state where the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation notification is performed, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects By setting error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the navigation notification is terminated and a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the error notification is performed during the period from the start of the navigation notification to the end. Is supposed to limit what happens.

  A conventional slot machine includes a main control unit that performs control related to the progress of a game and a sub-control unit that performs control related to performance. The main control unit is configured to generate a medal number to be paid out to a player or when an error related to a game occurs. It is provided with a game auxiliary indicator capable of displaying an error code indicating its contents, and it is possible to transmit a command capable of specifying the internal lottery result to the sub-control unit. According to the internal lottery result specified based on the command, an operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like provided in the sub-control unit and notified.

  In such a configuration, an advantageous operation mode cannot be specified due to a malfunction in the sub-control unit or the liquid crystal display, and there is a possibility that a disadvantage may be caused to the player. In addition to performing control to display an advantageous operation mode, an advantageous operation mode is displayed using the game auxiliary display 12 on which the number of medals to be paid out to the player is displayed. When the number of medals to be paid out and the operation mode advantageous to the player are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 provided in the main control unit 41, the number of medals to be paid out to the player on one display and the player Since advantageous operation modes are both displayed, there is a risk of misrecognizing the display contents when the display at that time is switched.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can display the number of medals to be paid out to the player as predetermined contents, and an error code indicating the contents when an error relating to the game occurs. A display device 12 is provided, and the game auxiliary display device 12 displays a navigation number that can identify an advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of a stop switch that is advantageous to the player as display content different from the predetermined content. It is possible, and after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and displaying the payout number of medals as the predetermined content, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is once initialized and hidden. Since the predetermined contents are displayed, a new display means is not provided when the navigation number is displayed on the display directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side. By displaying the navigation number using the game auxiliary display 12 that displays the number of medals paid out as the predetermined content, the predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed, and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When the predetermined content is displayed after the display, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized and hidden to display the predetermined content, so that the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is It can be prevented that the navigation number or the predetermined content is misidentified.

  When the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the payout number of medals as the predetermined content, the main control unit 41 temporarily initializes the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 and hides it. It is sufficient that the predetermined content is displayed after the state is set to the above state, and the period during which the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed may be a period at which the player or the like can recognize at least that the display has been turned off. In this embodiment, there is provided a predetermined standby period in which the main control unit 41 waits after initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and after the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the predetermined content is displayed. When the medal payout number is displayed, the game auxiliary display 12 is surely controlled to be hidden.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and displays the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content, the predetermined standby period for waiting is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. It is sufficient that the mode is a period in which the player or the like can recognize at least that the lamp has been turned off while switching from the navigation notification to the notification of the number of payouts. By doing so, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed and the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched. Therefore, the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily switched between the navigation notification and the payout number notification. It can be controlled to be turned off. Further, for example, when the stop switch for the third stop is operated and the stop switch is released, the timer is activated, and the predetermined time is counted by the timer. The game auxiliary display 12 may be configured to be temporarily turned off while switching from navigation notification to notification of the number of payouts by waiting for a standby period.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment provides the output buffer of the game auxiliary indicator 12 when the third stop switch is operated when the game auxiliary indicator 12 performs navigation notification. Once the game is initialized, the payout number display data is set in the output buffer, so that the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is temporarily controlled to be turned off while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the payout number. Although there is a display not related to the game (for example, “-”, “_”, etc.) while switching from the navigation notification to the notification of the number of payouts, the display content of the navigation notification and the notification of the number of payouts are displayed. The content can be prevented from being mistaken.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment temporarily displays the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 when displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displaying the payout number of medals as the predetermined content. The display amount of the medals is displayed by setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 after the display is made non-displayed, and the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily initialized. When the payout number display data is set, the data is displayed to display the total number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of a small role. The total number of medals to be paid out is displayed over the period until the game is completed. In this case, after setting data for displaying 0 as initial data of the payout number display data, each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c, the payout number display data is used as the number of payout medals. The total number of medals that have been paid out is displayed in order, and finally the total number of medals paid out for winning a small role is displayed. There may be. Even in such a configuration, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the number of medals paid out is displayed as the predetermined content after the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is performed. By initializing the contents and setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content, Can be prevented from being mistaken.

  When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c. And in the structure which controls to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, the data which shows 0 sheets as the initial data of the payout number display data and hides the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is set. Thereafter, the payout sensor 34c may be controlled to update so that the payout number display data is incremented by one each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. With such a configuration, the period from when the medal payout is started with the winning of the small role until the first medal payout is detected, that is, the number of paid out medals is 0. During a certain period, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed, and after that, when the payout of the first medal is detected, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed and the total number of medals for which payout has been completed. When the number of medals is displayed as the predetermined content after the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation number is displayed as the display content of the game auxiliary display 12. After being displayed, after the display is once hidden, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. The same effect as the configuration of the present embodiment is obtained, and the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is Na Or a number, or a predetermined content, can be prevented from being misidentified.

  When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Then, in the configuration that controls to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, when the navigation notification is terminated and a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, 0 is displayed as initial data of the payout number display data. Data is set so that the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed, and thereafter, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is updated so as to be incremented by one. It is good also as a structure. By adopting such a configuration, a period until a predetermined waiting time elapses after navigation notification is ended and initial data of the payout number display data is set by the payout sensor 34c. During the period from when the payout is detected to when the payout number display data is updated, the display of the game auxiliary display 12 can be in a non-display state, and the same effect as the configuration of the present embodiment can be obtained. It can be prevented that the display content displayed on the display device 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content.

  When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c. And in the structure which controls to update the display of the game auxiliary indicator 12, the display content of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is initialized by initializing the navigation notification display data when the third stop operation is performed. Is temporarily hidden, and when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed after the navigation notification display data is initialized, 0 is displayed as initial data of the payout number display data and the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed. Then, each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c, the payout number display data is updated to be incremented by one. It may be configured. By adopting such a configuration, a period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is ended, and a predetermined waiting time elapses after the navigation notification display data is initialized. The game auxiliary display 12 has a period and a period from when initial data of the payout number display data is set to when the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of the first medal and the payout number display data is updated. The display can be made in a non-display state, and the same effect as the configuration of the present embodiment can be obtained. Can be prevented. Note that during these periods, that is, the period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is terminated, the period from when the navigation notification display data is initialized until a predetermined waiting time elapses, the payout By applying only one of the periods from when the initial data of the number display data is set to when the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of the first medal and the payout number display data is updated. After the navigation notification is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, it may be configured to be temporarily hidden and display the number of paid-out medals, or any two of these periods may be displayed. The structure to apply may be sufficient.

  When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated each time the medal payout is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Thus, in the configuration in which the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be updated, “1” to “9” can be displayed as display modes of the payout number on the game auxiliary display 12. A part of the display mode in the notification (navigation numbers “1” to “13” and “.”) Is included in the display mode of the payout number. However, when the displays on the two indicators 12L and 12R are integrated, for example, in navigation notification, the eighth segment of the indicator 12R and the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the navigation number are used. of While the first to seventh segments are turned on, in the payout number display, only the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the payout number are turned on, so that the display contents and payout of the navigation notification are displayed. It is possible to prevent the display content of the number notification from being misidentified.

  After starting the game, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment starts from the start of the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed until the stop switch for the third stop operation is released. Since the navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 over the period of time, the period from the start to the end of the game Thus, the player can be made to recognize an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts the third stop operation from the start of the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed from the start of the game to the end of the game. The navigation number is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period until the stop switch is released. However, as the game starts, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed as the game progresses. The navigation number is continued on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period from one start timing until the operation becomes effective until one end timing after the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated as the game ends. For example, when the start switch 7 is operated with a specified number of bets set, at the start of the game. When starting the control to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed, from the start timing of any one of the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, from the end of the game For example, when the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, when the payout of medals is started or finished with winning, for the next game A configuration may be adopted in which the navigation number is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period up to any one end timing when the betting number setting operation is performed.

  Among such configurations, in particular, the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed when the start switch 7 is operated with a specified number of bets set at a start timing. By starting any of the above, the navigation number display on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. In addition, one start timing is any one of when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled when starting the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed, For example, during the period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started at a predetermined constant speed, a reel effect that rotates the reels in a manner different from that of the normal game, etc. Even if it is configured to perform or is controlled to a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined time, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started after the reel production or the freeze state is finished, It is possible to restrict the navigation number from being displayed during the period during which the reel effect is performed. In addition, when one start timing is set when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, an event that occurs during the period until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, for example, The display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is started at a predetermined timing at the start of the game, regardless of whether or not the reel re-acceleration or the re-acceleration of the reel accompanying the return from power interruption occurs. be able to.

  In particular, when one stop timing is set when the stop switch for the third stop operation is pressed, all the reels 2L, 2C, Since the display content on the game auxiliary display 12 can be hidden during the period from when 2R stops until the winning determination is made, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with winning, It is possible to prevent the number and the number of payouts from being misidentified.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is information relating to the result of the game as a predetermined content, and is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 used to display the number of medals to be paid out to the player when a winning occurs at the end of the game. The navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch advantageous to the player is displayed as the display content different from the predetermined content, and the stop switch advantageous to the player is displayed. While the advantageous operation mode is displayed during the game, the payout number as a predetermined content is displayed after the game is over, so that the display period of the navigation number and the payout number display period overlap in the game auxiliary display 12. You do n’t have to.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment causes the game auxiliary display 12 to display a navigation number that can specify a stop mode that is advantageous to the player, and the number of medals to be paid out when winning a small role. The display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of paid-out medals do not include a common mode. It can be prevented that the payout number is displayed as the content.

  In addition, the display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of paid-out medals are obtained when the display on the two displays 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is integrated. In addition, any configuration that does not include a common mode may be used. For example, the display mode of the navigation number may include a configuration that includes a part of the display mode of the number of payouts and vice versa.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the number of medals to be paid out in a part of the display mode (navigation numbers “1” to “13” and “.”) Of the game auxiliary indicator 12 in the navigation notification. The display mode (for example, “8” when paying out 8 cards) is included, but the display mode by navigation notification is the display mode for the number of medals to be paid out (for example, “8” when paying out 8 cards). It is good also as a structure which does not contain. By adopting such a configuration, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not controlled to the same mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals, and the display mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals to be paid out. It is possible to prevent the display mode from being misidentified.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 turns on the eighth segment of the display 12L in the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification, while in the display mode that notifies the number of medals to be paid out. By turning off the eighth segment of the indicator 12, the display mode of one of the two indicators 12L and 12R informs the display mode of the navigation notification or the number of medals to be paid out. The display mode can be identified, but when the display mode of at least two indicators 12L and 12R is viewed as a unit, the display mode by navigation notification and the display mode by notification of the number of medals to be paid out are identified. A possible configuration is also possible. As such a configuration, for example, when the navigation number “8” is notified in the navigation notification, “−8” is displayed as an integrated display by displaying “8” on the display 12L and “−” on the display 12R. On the other hand, in the notification of the number of medals to be paid out, “8” is displayed on the display 12L and “8” is displayed on the display 12R so that “8” is displayed as an integrated display. Thus, it is possible to prevent the display mode based on the navigation notification and the display mode based on the notification of the number of medals to be paid out from being misidentified.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 while the navigation assistance display 12 displays the navigation number as an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player, Is detected, the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are hidden by initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the main It is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 when the operation of the control unit 41 or the like becomes unstable.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when a power interruption is detected while the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Although it is the structure which controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to non-display, it may be the structure which controls the game auxiliary display 12 to non-display when a power interruption is detected. Based on the set data, by clearing the output port that outputs a control signal to the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. By restricting the output of the drive signal that is output from the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed. It may be configured such that. Even in such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power interruption.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the reels to a predetermined constant speed as the game progresses, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid, and the game auxiliary display 12 has a game. The power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in a state in which the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the user is displayed, and the state before the power interruption is resumed. When returning, after the navigation number is displayed again on the game auxiliary display 12, when the reel whose rotation has been controlled before power interruption becomes constant speed rotation, the operation of the stop switch of the corresponding reel is accepted. By controlling to enable, when returning from the power interruption, the navigation number display on the game auxiliary display 12 can be resumed before the stop switch operation acceptance becomes valid. It is possible to prevent the stop switch will be operated in the operation mode other than the preferred operating mode, which is suggested by bi numbers.

  When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment returns the control state to the state before power interruption, the main control unit 41 returns the state of accepting operation of the stop switch and the excitation pattern of the reel to the state before power interruption. At the time of return of the control unit 41, the operation acceptance of the stop switch is validated and the rotation control of the reel is started with the excitation pattern before power interruption. Rotation control will be started by an excitation pattern, that is, a constant speed pattern for rotating at a constant speed rotation, but in order to start rotation of a stopped reel, torque is insufficient and rotation does not start. After starting the reel rotation control, the reel sensor does not detect the reference position for a predetermined period (when the reel is rotated, the reel sensor detects the reference position). When a period longer than the time required for detection) has elapsed, it is determined that the reel rotation error has occurred, the operation of the stop switch is invalidated, and the excitation pattern is changed to a start pattern for accelerating from the stop state. Since the reel rotation control is started again, the reel can be accelerated to a predetermined constant speed. Then, it is possible to validate the stop switch operation acceptance that has been invalidated as a result of the reel rotation error when the reel has been accelerated to a predetermined constant speed. In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the main control unit 41 is restored, the navigation notification display data is reset in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the slot machine When the power supply to 1 is resumed, after the display of the navigation number by the navigation notification is started on the game auxiliary display 12, it is possible to validate the acceptance of the stop operation by the stop switch. When the stop operation by the stop switch can be performed, the navigation number can be surely displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to perform the navigation notification. Further, in such a configuration, when the main control unit 41 returns, the stop operation by the stop switch is once validated and then invalidated, and then the reel rotation control is performed again. When the reel rotates at a constant speed, the stop operation by the stop switch is re-enabled, but when the main control unit 41 returns, the navigation notification display data is displayed in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. By resetting, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 can be continuously displayed even after the main control unit 41 is restored until the stop operation by the top switch is validated again. When the player can perform a stop operation with the stop switch, the navigation number is surely displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation information is displayed. It can be carried out.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R after the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started in a state where the specified number of bets is set. In a state before the game is finished by stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed with a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player. When an error that causes an error code to be displayed is detected, when an error is detected during the game by starting the display of the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 when the game ends. Since the display of the error code as the predetermined content is restricted on the game auxiliary display 12 during the period until the game ends, the game auxiliary display 12 Whether the display content displayed is navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode, or an error code as a predetermined content, it can be prevented from being misidentified.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays an error code as a predetermined content other than the navigation number in a state in which the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When the condition to be satisfied is satisfied, the predetermined content is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 until the game ends. However, in the state where the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, other than the navigation number In other words, the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is the navigation number or the predetermined content, even if the display content other than the error code is applied as the predetermined content. Can be prevented from being misidentified.

  Next, the control regarding the setting of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment sets the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the first display content of the medal given by the small role winning is given. The number of payouts can be displayed, and by setting navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display a navigation number that suggests a stop operation mode advantageous to the player as the second display content Furthermore, by setting error display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs as special display contents.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), the main control unit 41 has a period during which payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the payout number is displayed as the first display content. If an error display condition is satisfied as a predetermined display switching condition for switching the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 to the special display content, the error state is controlled and the output buffer A evacuation process for evacuating data to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the payout number display data set in the output buffer is evacuated to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, by initializing the output buffer and controlling the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 to non-display, by setting error display data as data for displaying the special display content in the output buffer, While controlling to display the error code as the special display content on the game auxiliary display 12, it is controlled to the error state and stands by.

  When the reset condition is satisfied by releasing the error state by operating the reset switch 23 according to a predetermined operation procedure, a return process is performed to return the data saved in the RAM 41c to the output buffer. The payout number display data for displaying the payout number as the first display content is returned from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer, so that the game auxiliary display 12 displays the payout number as the first display content. .

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects the error because the error display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the error display condition is satisfied after the error is detected. In the period from when the error display condition is satisfied, the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are restricted from being changed, and an error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 when the period has elapsed. Be able to.

  In addition, when an error is detected when the game is started and at least one reel is controlled to rotate, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment performs a stop operation of all the reels, When the game is finished by stopping the reel, the error is notified. However, when the game is started and the reel is controlled to rotate, an error is detected when an error is detected. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may detect the error when displaying the navigation number as the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12. In some cases, an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the total number of medals to be paid out as a payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 as a result of winning a small role (in this embodiment, 8). If an error is detected during the period in which the total number of medals to be paid out is displayed as the first display content by setting the data to be displayed, then the error display condition is When established, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched to display an error code indicating the content of the error detected as the special display content (see FIG. 44). When displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting initial data of the payout number display data, the payout sensor 34c detects the medal payout. The payout number display data may be updated every time and the display of the game auxiliary display 12 may be controlled to be updated. In such a configuration, each time a payout of the medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c. During the control of paying out a predetermined number of medals with the winning of a small role while updating the payout number display data, for example, a payout error (E1) is detected due to insufficient medals in the hopper unit 34. If the error display condition is satisfied, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals last detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth number) is saved in the save area. It will be. Thereafter, by temporarily initializing the output buffer, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be non-displayed, error display data indicating a payout error is set in the output buffer, and an error code is displayed. When the return condition is satisfied, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals finally detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth number, etc.) is used as the payout number display data. By returning to the output buffer 12, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 can be returned to the display contents when an error is detected.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (b), the main control unit 41 is in a period in which navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number is displayed as the second display content. If an error display condition is subsequently detected, the error state is controlled, and then the error state is controlled, and a common saving process is performed when the first display content is switched to the special display content. The navigation notification display data set in the output buffer can be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  Then, the error display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the error code is displayed as the special display content, while waiting in the error state, and when the return condition is satisfied, it is saved in the RAM 41c described above. When the data of the first display content is restored to the output buffer, the navigation notification display data of the RAM 41c is restored to the output buffer by performing a common restoration process, and the game auxiliary display 12 is set to the state before error detection. Similar navigation numbers can be displayed.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be used when the payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 or when the navigation notification display data is set. By performing a common saving process, the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data can be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Even when returning to the output buffer, by performing a common return process, the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c can be returned to the output buffer. ing.

  In the configuration in which both the number of medals paid out to the player and the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player are displayed on one display as in the present embodiment, the display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out The processing and the display processing for displaying the advantageous operation mode may interfere with each other, and an unintended display may be performed on the game auxiliary display.

  On the other hand, the game auxiliary display 12 provided in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display display contents based on the predetermined data by setting predetermined data in the output buffer. The main control unit 41 sets the payout number display data as the predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and pays out medals to be given as a first display content by winning a small role It is possible to display the number of images, and by setting navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display a navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode advantageous to the player as the second display content. In addition, by setting error display data in the output buffer, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs is displayed as special display contents. When the error display condition is satisfied as a condition for displaying the special display content in a state where the game auxiliary display device 12 displays the payout number of medals as the first display content, After executing the save process and saving the payout number display data set in the output buffer to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the error display data for displaying the error code as the special display content is set in the output buffer. When the return condition is satisfied by displaying the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 and the error state is canceled, the return processing is executed, and the payout number display data saved in the RAM 41c is output to the output buffer. By returning to, it is possible to display the number of medals paid out again as the first display content on the game auxiliary display 12. The above save process is executed when an error display condition is satisfied in a state in which a navigation number indicating a stop operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed as the second display content on the game auxiliary display 12. Thus, after the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the error display data for displaying the error code as the special display content is set in the output buffer. An error code is displayed on the display unit 12, and when the return condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the above-described return processing is executed to output the navigation notification display data saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By returning to the buffer, it is possible to display the navigation number again as the second display content on the game auxiliary display 12, Data or second table for making the first display content set in the output buffer when a condition for switching to the display of the special display content is satisfied during the display of the first display content or the second display content The data for saving the contents, the special display contents are set in the output buffer, the special display contents are displayed, and the data for displaying the first display contents saved when the return condition is satisfied, or the second Since the data for displaying the display contents is returned to the output buffer and the first display contents or the second display contents are displayed again, different types of information can be displayed correctly.

  Further, by executing a common saving process, the payout number display data set in the output buffer is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to save, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the save processing for saving these display contents.

  Further, the main control unit 41 executes a common evacuation process when a switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied even when the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed. The non-display data set in the output buffer may be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. With such a configuration, regardless of the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, Since the processing when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be made common, the capacity of the processing performed when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restores the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer by executing a common return process, and is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since the navigation notification display data can be returned to the output buffer, the capacity of the return process for returning these display contents can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 while displaying the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player on the game auxiliary display 12. When the power interruption is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized so that the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed. Regardless of the displayed content, when the power interruption is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 may be initialized. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 during power interruption regardless of the display state on the game auxiliary display 12.

  In addition, the main control part 41 of a present Example can display a predetermined display content on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting predetermined data to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and a display is possible. When switching the contents, the data set in the output buffer is saved in the RAM 41c and new data is set to switch the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 to the display contents based on the new data. However, when the first output buffer and the second output buffer are provided so as to be switchable, and the first output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the first output buffer is set. While the display contents based on the data set in the output buffer of the game are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the second output buffer is used as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. When the buffer is set, the display contents based on the data set in the second output buffer are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the output buffers are the first output buffer and the second output buffer. It is good also as a structure which can switch the display content of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 by switching by.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, in the configuration in which the first output buffer and the second output buffer are provided as the output buffers of the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 displays the game auxiliary display. This occurs when an error is detected when the payout number display data is set in the first output buffer set as the output buffer of the game machine 12 to display the payout number on the game auxiliary display 12. While the error display data including the error code indicating the content of the error being set is set in the second output buffer, the payout number display data set in the first output buffer is held as it is. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the error assist condition is controlled, and the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched from the first output buffer to the second output buffer. Control is made to display an error code based on the error display data set in the output buffer No. 2, while controlling to an error state and waiting.

  When the reset condition is satisfied by canceling the error state by operating the reset switch 23 according to a predetermined operation procedure, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed from the second output buffer to the first output buffer. By switching to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the payout number based on the payout number display data held in the first output buffer. Further, when the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched when the return condition is satisfied, the second output buffer is initialized based on the cancellation of the error state.

  Although not shown, the navigation assistance display data is set in the first output buffer by using the output buffer of the gaming assistance display 12 as the first output buffer, and the navigation number is displayed on the gaming assistance display 12. When an error is detected and an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12, the error display data is displayed in the second output buffer when the error is detected. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the error buffer can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the second output buffer. When the return condition is satisfied, the display content of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is changed by switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary indicator 12 to the first output buffer. It is possible to return to a fine number.

  By adopting such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the present embodiment, the number of medals to be awarded as a first display content by winning a small role, and a stop operation advantageous to the player as a second display content It is possible to display a navigation number suggesting an aspect and an error code indicating the content as a special display content when the error occurs on the common game auxiliary display 12.

  When the main control unit 41 detects an error, the main control unit 41 sets error display data including an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred in the second output buffer, the error state is canceled, and the return condition is satisfied. Since the error display data is erased by initializing the second output buffer, the second output is output over the period from when the error is detected until the return condition is satisfied, that is, during the period in which the error occurs. Since the error display data is held in the buffer, it is possible to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, determination of an error occurrence state, using the data set in the second output buffer. Yes.

  Further, the main control unit 41 sets the error display data in the second output buffer when an error is detected, while holding the data set in the first output buffer as it is. By using data set in the output buffer, it is possible to perform predetermined determination processing, for example, determination of a control status such as whether navigation notification is in progress or payout.

  In addition, after setting the error display data in the second output buffer, the main control unit 41 switches the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the second output buffer when the error display condition is satisfied. After switching the buffer to the second output buffer, the display contents based on the data set in the second output buffer can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 without delay.

  Also in such a configuration, when displaying the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, every time a payout of the medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c. The payout number display data may be updated to control the display of the game auxiliary display 12 so that an error occurs while the payout number display data is being updated. When the error display condition is satisfied, during the period in which the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 based on the second output buffer, the payout number display data that is in the process of being updated is the first output. Since it is held in the buffer, when the return condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed on the basis of the first output buffer. The display of the payout number in aid display 12, can be returned to the display contents when an error is detected.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 sets the first output buffer and the second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration including the output buffer, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player as the normal display content and the error code indicating the content of the error occurring as the special display content. 12 is configured so that the first output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation notification display data is set in the first output buffer, so that the normal display contents The navigation number can be displayed as a switching condition for displaying the special display contents while the normal display contents are displayed. Based on the data set in the second output buffer, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched from the first output buffer to the second output buffer when the error display condition is satisfied. When the special display content is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the return condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed from the second output buffer to the first output buffer. By switching to, the navigation auxiliary display 12 again displays the navigation number as the first display content, so that different types of information can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as in the configuration of the present embodiment. Each can be displayed correctly.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 has a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration including the error control condition, the main control unit 41 is the content of the error that has occurred before the error display condition is established as the switching condition for displaying the error code as the special display content and after the error is detected. By setting the error display data including the error code indicating the error display data to display the error code as the special display content without being aware of the timing when the error display condition is satisfied, the second output The timing set in the buffer can be designed relatively freely.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 has a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration including the first data buffer, it is possible to refer to data set in the first output buffer or the second output buffer in a predetermined determination process (for example, error determination). Since a predetermined determination process can be performed using data set in the output buffer or the second output buffer (for example, in the case of error determination, data set in the second output buffer), a predetermined determination can be made. It is not necessary to have data used for processing separately from display content data.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 has a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration comprising the above, as the normal display content, the medal payout number (first display content) to be paid out to the player upon winning, and the advantageous operation advantageous to the player, in which the display period does not overlap with the first display content The main control unit 41 includes the navigation number (second display content) indicating the mode, and the main control unit 41 sets the first display content and the second display content in the first output buffer, thereby allowing the game auxiliary display 12 to By displaying the number of medals to be paid out and the navigation number, it is possible to display the game auxiliary display by setting the first output buffer for both different display contents that do not overlap the display period. Can be displayed in 12, it is not necessary to provide an extra output buffer.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 has a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents. In the configuration comprising: when the power interruption is detected regardless of which display is being performed on the game auxiliary indicator 12, the first output buffer and the second output buffer are set. It is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of a power interruption.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the game control board 40 can be connected to the test apparatus 1300 via the first interface board (IF1) 1100 and the second interface board (IF2) 1200, and the slot A test signal generated in relation to a game result in the machine 1 is output from the game control board 40 to the test apparatus 1300, and a test signal is input from the test apparatus 1300 to the game control board 40. The simulation test can be automatically performed by connecting the game control board 40 and the test apparatus 1300.

  The game control board 40 is connected to the IF1 board 1100 and connected to the first information output circuit 40a for outputting the first test signal, the input circuit 40d for inputting the test signal, and the IF2 board 1200 for the second test. A second information output circuit 40b for outputting a signal is mounted.

  The first test signal indicates the control state and the game result. The insertion request ramp signal, the start possible ramp signal, the BB signal, the RB game signal, the replay game signal, and the first to third reels can be stopped. Ramp signal, first to third reel index signal, payout request signal, payout count signal, stop signal, set value display 7 segment display ag signal, internal winning flag 1-8 signal, signal delaying signal, first A reel motor excitation signal, a second reel motor excitation signal, and a third reel motor excitation signal are included. These first test signals are output under the control of the main control unit 41.

  The insertion request lamp signal is a drive signal of the insertion request LED 17, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the insertion request LED 17 is lit, and can specify whether or not a medal insertion is requested.

  The start enable lamp signal is a drive signal of the start valid LED 18, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the start valid LED 18 is lit, and can specify whether or not a game start operation is requested. .

  The BB in-progress signal, RB game in-progress signal, and replay game in-progress signal are signals indicating that the gaming state is BB, during RB, and during the replay game, respectively, and the gaming state at that time can be specified.

  The first to third reel stop enable lamp signals are signals indicating whether the left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R are driven, that is, whether the left, middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C and 22R are lit. It is possible to specify whether or not the left reel, middle reel, and right reel can be stopped.

  The first to third reel index signals are detection signals of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R, and can specify the passage of the reference positions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

  The payout request signal is a drive signal for the hopper motor 34b, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the hopper motor 34b is being driven, and it is possible to specify that a medal payout operation is being performed.

  The payout count signal is a signal that is output every time a medal payout associated with winning is detected, and is a signal that causes the test apparatus 1300 to count the payout of medals.

  The stop signal is a signal indicating that the stop state is controlled.

  The 7-segment display a to g signals for setting value display are drive signals for the LEDs constituting each segment of the setting value display 24, and the setting values displayed on the setting value display 24 can be specified. .

  The internal winning flags 1 to 8 are signals indicating the winning status of the combination. Further, the signal delaying signal is a signal indicating that the signal is in a delayed state with the execution of an effect during the game.

  The first to third reel motor excitation signals are drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, that is, the reel motors that drive the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and the drive status of each reel can be specified. .

  The test signals include an input switch signal, a reel start switch signal, first to third reel stop switch signals, a payout switch signal, a stop release switch signal, a setting key switch signal, and a setting switch signal. Input to the substrate 40. These test signals are signals that function in the same manner as the detection signals of the various switches and sensors provided in the slot machine 1, detected by the switch detection circuit 44 provided in the game control board 40, and each test signal by the main control unit 41. The detection of a switch or sensor corresponding to is determined.

  The insertion switch signal is a signal corresponding to the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel start switch signal is a signal corresponding to the start switch 7. The first to third reel stop switch signals are signals corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively. The payout switch signal is a signal corresponding to the payout sensor 34c. The stop release switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset switch 23. The setting key switch signal is a signal corresponding to the setting key switch 37. The setting switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset / setting switch 38.

  The first information output circuit 40a is a circuit for outputting a first test signal to the IF1 board 1100, and the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a passes through the IF1 board 1100. Output to the test apparatus 1300.

  The input circuit 40d is a circuit for inputting a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 substrate 1100. The test signal input to the input circuit 40d is detected by the switch detection circuit 44. .

  The IF1 substrate 1100 includes an input terminal to which the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is input, and an output terminal to output the input first test signal to the test apparatus 1300. ing. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler, and the information included in the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is electrically insulated from the test apparatus 1300. Is transmitted to the side. The IF1 substrate 1100 includes an input terminal to which a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 is input, and an output terminal that outputs the input test signal to the input circuit 40d. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler, and information included in the test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 is transmitted to the input circuit 40d in an electrically insulated state. It has become. The first test signal and the test signal may be transmitted while the input terminal and the output terminal are electrically insulated. For example, the input terminal and the output are output via a photo interrupter or an isolator. The structure which connects with a terminal may be sufficient.

  The second test signal indicates an operation mode notified by navigation notification, and includes a game start signal and a navigation notification signal. The second test signal is output under the control of the main control unit 41.

  The game start signal is a signal indicating the start of the game. The navigation in-progress signal is output from the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification display data for displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification using the game auxiliary display 12 described above. This is a drive signal for lighting the eighth segment of the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the fact that the navigation notification is executed and the type of the winning notification target role and game Is turned on when a navigation number indicating a stop operation mode advantageous to the user is displayed on the display devices 12L and 12R, no navigation notification is executed, and no navigation number is displayed on the display devices 12L and 12R. It is a signal indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being executed due to the off state sometimes.

  The display signal is based on the fact that the navigation notification display data, the payout number display data, and the error display data are set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification performed using the game auxiliary display 12 described above. This is a drive signal for turning on the first to seventh segments of the display devices 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display device 12 in a lighting mode for displaying any one of the navigation number, the number of payouts, and the error code. It includes a plurality of information such as information, information relating to the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and information relating to an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs.

  The navigation notification signal is a signal generated by extracting only the information related to the navigation notification from the display signal by the conversion circuit 40c mounted on the second information output circuit, and the navigation number is displayed during the navigation notification. It is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode to be displayed, and is a signal that can specify the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode notified by the navigation notification.

  The second information output circuit 40b is a circuit for outputting a second test signal to the IF2 substrate 1200, and the second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b passes through the IF2 substrate 1200. Output to the test apparatus 1300.

  In addition, a navigation in-progress signal and a display signal input to the game auxiliary display 12 provided on the game control board 40 are branched and input to the second information output circuit 40b on the game control board 40. And a conversion circuit 40c that converts the display signal into a navigation notification signal by enabling or disabling the display signal based on the in-navigation signal, and outputs the navigation signal. The display signal of the display device 12 can be output to the IF2 substrate 1200 as a navigation notification signal.

  The IF2 substrate 1200 is a test apparatus based on the input terminal to which the second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is input and the input second test signal (game start signal, navigation notification signal). An IF2 control unit 1203 that converts the second test signal to be recognizable on the 1300 side, and an output terminal that outputs the second test signal generated by the IF2 control unit 1203 to the test apparatus 1300. .

  The IF2 control unit 1203 includes a CPU, RAM, ROM, a reset circuit for resetting the CPU, and the like. The navigation notification signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is used as a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation. Signal and stop strobe signal are converted and output. The stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, and stop strobe signal output from the IF2 control unit 1203 are output from the output terminal via the photocoupler. The IF2 control unit 1203 side and the test apparatus 1300 side The signal is transmitted in a state where and are electrically insulated. The IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal are electrically insulated from each other as long as the stop execution position signal, the stop reel designation signal, and the stop strobe signal are transmitted. For example, a photo interrupter or an isolator is connected. Alternatively, the IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal may be connected via each other.

  The stop execution position signal is a signal indicating the most recommended stop operation position for the reel indicated by the stop reel designation signal described later according to the current gaming state and effect mode, and the corresponding reel included in the most recommended stop operation position. The number of steps (0 to 336) of the reel motor can be specified.

  The stop reel designation signal is a signal that designates whether the reel that recommends the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the stop execution position signal is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel. The reel to which the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the execution position signal is applied can be specified.

  The stop strobe signal is a signal for requesting acquisition of a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal.

  The game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 are connected via a power supply line, and power used by a device such as a photocoupler mounted on the IF1 board 1100 is supplied from the game control board 40 via the power supply line. On the other hand, the game control board 40 and the IF2 board 1200 are not connected by the power line, and the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 are connected via the power line and supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100. Part of the generated power is supplied as power used by devices such as the IF2 control unit 1203 and the photocoupler mounted on the IF2 substrate 1200 via the IF1 substrate 1100. Therefore, as the power supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100 via the power line, the power used by the device mounted on the IF1 board 1100 and the power used by the device mounted on the IF2 board 1200 , Both of which are ensured.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is equipped with a connection terminal to which wiring from the IF1 board 1100 and IF2 board 1200 can be connected, and a first information output circuit 40a, a second information output circuit 40b, and an input circuit 40d. A possible socket is provided, and a wiring pattern for transmitting a first test signal output from the main control unit 41 and various drive circuits to the socket of the first information output circuit 40a, and a second test signal are provided. A wiring pattern for transmitting to the socket of the second information output circuit 40b and a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal from the connection terminal to the switch detection circuit 44 via the input circuit 40d are formed. The first test signal and the second test signal output from the various drive circuits are the wiring pattern, the first information output circuit 40a, Is outputted through the second information output circuit 40b and the connecting terminal, the connecting terminal, an input circuit 40d and the test signal inputted via the wiring pattern are inputted to the switch detection circuit 44.

  In addition, since the connection terminal includes, for example, a signal pin that can connect a probe from the IF1 board 1100 and a connector that can connect a cable from the IF1 board 1100, the connection terminal can be connected to the IF1 board 1100 via these connection terminals. It is possible to easily connect the wires.

  The connection terminals are provided for the purpose of connecting the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, and the connection terminals for inputting and outputting these test signals and test signals are shipped to the amusement store. This is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine. For this reason, the gaming control board 40 of the present embodiment has a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminals, and can be cut along these cutting holes. At the time of shipment, the portion where the connection terminal is provided can be cut off so that unnecessary signals cannot be input and output. Thereby, for example, the internal winning flag 1-8 signal is detected in the hall device, the winning status of the internal winning flag is identified from the internal winning flag 1-8 signal, and the fact is notified, etc. It can be prevented from being easily used for the purpose. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

  The first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b are provided for the purpose of outputting the first test signal and the second test signal to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, respectively. The input circuit 40d is provided for the purpose of inputting a test signal from the IF1 board 1100, and is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine shipped to the game store. is there. For this reason, the game control board 40 of this embodiment is provided with sockets in which the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d can be mounted. (2) The information output circuit 40b and the input circuit 40d can be easily removed, and the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d are not required when shipped to the game store. It is possible to make it impossible to input / output a simple signal. Thereby, for example, the internal winning flag 1-8 signal is detected in the hall device, the winning status of the internal winning flag is identified from the internal winning flag 1-8 signal, and the fact is notified, etc. It can be prevented from being easily used for the purpose. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

  The number of slot machines provided for testing by a third-party organization is usually about several units. In addition, the slot machines for mass production shipped to amusement stores receive these test signals and test signals. Since there is a low need for output, these slot machines for mass production may be equipped with a game control board 40 that has a wiring pattern but is not provided with the connection terminals described above. The manufacturing cost of the slot machine can be reduced. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the IF1 board 1100, the IF2 board 1200, and the test apparatus 1300 can be installed only by mounting the connection terminals. It becomes possible to connect easily. Also, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting test signals and test signals, and connection terminals for connection with the IF1 board 1100, IF2 board 1200, and test apparatus 1300. These wiring patterns and connection terminals may not be provided. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

  Further, the slot machine for mass production is mounted with the game control board 40 which is provided with a wiring pattern but does not have the sockets for the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b and the input circuit 40d described above. In this case, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be reduced. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the socket is mounted, and the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b are mounted. By simply attaching the input circuit 40d, it is possible to easily connect the IF1 board, the IF2 board, and the test apparatus 1300. In addition, a wiring pattern for transmitting test signals and test signals only to the test slot machine, and a socket for mounting the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d are provided for mass production. The slot machine may be configured without these wiring patterns and sockets. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

  In this embodiment, such a test signal and test signal are exchanged between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300, so that a simulation test is automatically performed. As a result of these tests, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be output. Specifically, the ratio of the number of times when the payout count signal is detected during the period to be tested (the number of medals to be paid out) to the number of times the insertion switch signal is output during the period to be tested (the number of medals consumed) is calculated. The result (consumption number / payout number) is output as the payout rate.

  The IF2 control unit 1203 first shows a reel that recommends a stop reel designation signal as the first stop reel in accordance with the presence / absence of navigation notification within a maximum of 2 seconds from the time when the main control unit 41 outputs the game start signal. In addition to updating to the output state, the stop execution position signal is updated to an output state indicating a recommended stop operation position for the reel, and after completion of the update of the stop reel designation signal and the stop execution position signal, a fixed time (50 ms) A stop strobe signal is output over a period of time, the recommended first stop reel and its stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and after the stop strobe signal is stopped, a predetermined time (50 ms) is waited. Next, in a similar procedure, the test apparatus 1300 is notified of the second stop reel and its stop operation position that are sequentially recommended, and the test apparatus 1300 is notified of the third stop reel and its stop operation position. After the notification of the third stop reel and its stop operation position, the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are cleared when a certain time (50 ms) has passed.

  As described above, the IF2 control unit 1203 sequentially sets the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, the third stop reel and its stop operation position to the test apparatus 1300 in accordance with the recommended operation mode. In response to the notification, the operation procedure recommended by the test apparatus 1300 can be specified.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, the third stop reel and its stop operation position are continuously provided to the test apparatus 1300 for a maximum of 2 seconds. However, instead of continuously transmitting these, it is also possible to transmit them sequentially when the game starts and when the reels stop.

  The ROM of the IF2 control unit 1203 stores a recommended operation mode table in which recommended operation modes are registered in advance according to the presence / absence of navigation notification. The IF2 control unit 1203 recommends according to the presence / absence of navigation notification. An operation mode is acquired from the recommended operation procedure table, and a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal are output based on the acquired operation mode. Note that the recommended operation mode table registered in advance may not be provided, and the recommended operation mode may be acquired using a program in which the IF2 control unit 1203 determines the recommended operation mode according to the presence / absence of navigation notification.

  In the present embodiment, the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is not performed, and when the navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting the winning of BB or RB is not output, the left middle right stop Stop reel designation signals are output in order, and a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which the symbols of the cherry and watermelon that can be missed can be drawn in for the corresponding stop reel is output. Note that such an operation mode corresponds to an operation mode in which the medal payout rate is highest in a situation where navigation notification is not performed.

  Further, when the navigation notification signal indicates that navigation notification is being performed and the navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting winning of BB or RB is output, the stop order is left middle right. A stop reel designation signal is output in order, and a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which a symbol constituting a special combination corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn is output for the corresponding stop reel. For example, when BB1 is won as a special role and 11 is output as the navigation number, stop execution indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol of “red 7” can be drawn for each rotating reel When a position signal is output, and other BB2, RB, and SB are elected as special roles, and 10, 12, and 13 are output as navigation numbers, “blue” is displayed according to the output navigation number. The stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the symbols “7”, “White 7” and “BAR” can be drawn is output.

  When the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order of the stop order specified from the navigation notification signal, and any corresponding stop reel is output. A stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position is output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a recommended operation mode is acquired according to the presence / absence of navigation notification, and a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired operation mode are output to the test apparatus 1300. It is possible to output a reel stop switch signal in an operation mode recommended according to the presence or absence of navigation notification on the device 1300 side, and a payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained by a test by the test device 1300.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the special combination (BB, RB) is won as a result of the internal lottery, the winning combination is established after the execution conditions for the special combination navigation notification determined on the main control unit 41 side are satisfied. The test apparatus 1300 generates a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating an operation mode for stopping a symbol corresponding to the navigation number by setting a navigation number (10 to 13) that suggests the symbol constituting the special role. In the slot machine in the market, after winning the special role in the internal lottery, after the special control is notified by the sub-control unit 91, the operation is performed in a stop operation mode in which the special role is won. In the same game as when a special role is won and a special role navigation notification condition is established and a confirmation notification is made, the navigation number is output and the special role is entered. Is thereby becomes possible to output a reel stop switch signal from the operation mode, it is possible to obtain a payout rate close to the payout rate of the market by the test by the test device 1300.

  Further, in this embodiment, a signal that can specify the number of steps of the reel motor corresponding to the output timing of the stop switch signal recommended as the stop execution position signal is output to the test apparatus 1300. Even when the number of symbols and the number of steps assigned to one symbol differ depending on the type of slot machine, the test apparatus 1300 can share the output control of the stop switch signal with respect to the stop execution position signal.

  The test system including the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment and a test apparatus 1300 capable of performing a game test using the slot machine has a first test signal out of the test signals output from the game control board 40. The second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. The second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 board 1100.

  In such a configuration, when power lines are connected from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 to supply power to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, respectively, the game control boards 40 and 1 Wiring between the interface board (IF1) and the IF2 board 1200 increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 can be connected via a power line, and power is directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100. Thus, power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and power supplied to the IF1 board 1100 is supplied from the IF1 board 1100 to the IF2 board 1200. The wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 and IF2 board 1200 can be reduced.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output a first test signal to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 board 1100, and to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. In contrast, the game control board 40 can be connected to the IF1 board 1100 via a power line, and the game control board 40 can directly supply power to the IF1 board 1100. While it can be supplied, it is not connected to the IF2 board 1200 via the power supply line, and power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, but to the IF2 board 1200 via the IF1 board 1100. On the other hand, since power can be supplied, the wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 and IF2 board 1200 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output a navigation notification signal including information related to navigation notification to the IF2 substrate 1200 as the second test signal. The IF2 substrate 1200 receives the navigation notification signal. Is provided with an IF2 control unit 1203 that generates signals (stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, stop strobe signal) in a mode that can be input by the test apparatus 1300, and the IF2 control unit 1203 is a game control board. 40 is operated by the power supplied from the game control board 40 via the IF1 board 1100, so that it is not necessary to output power from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and only the second test signal is outputted. Thus, the IF2 control unit 1203 generates a signal that can be input by the test apparatus 1300 and outputs the signal to the test apparatus 1300. And next, it is possible to simplify the test signal output from the gaming control board 40.

  The game control board 40 may generate a second test signal that can be input by the test apparatus 1300, and output the second test signal to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. good.

  The IF1 board 1100 only relays the first test signal output from the game control board 40, but the IF1 board 1100 also has a control unit on which a CPU and the like are mounted, It is good also as a structure which changes into the aspect which can input the output 1st test signal in the testing apparatus 1300, and simplifies the test signal output from the game control board 40 by setting it as such a structure. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 are mounted with photocouplers, and the input terminals and output terminals of each board are connected via the photocouplers, and output from the game control board 40. The first test signal and the second test signal are output to the test apparatus via the photocouplers mounted on the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, whereby the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300 are electrically connected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other device from being damaged due to an abnormality in one device.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is equipped with indicators 12L and 12R that display the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that are notified by the navigation notification, and the indicators 12L and 12R are displayed by the navigation notification. A display signal that is a drive signal for turning on the LED is branched and output to the IF2 substrate as a navigation notification signal via the second information output circuit 40b, whereby the indicators 12L and 12R. The driving signal can be used as a navigation notification signal.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification when controlling to the AT, and the game control board 40 sends a first test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1100. The configuration includes a first information output circuit 40a for outputting, and a second information output circuit 40b for outputting a second test signal to the IF2 substrate 1200 as a navigation notification signal including information related to navigation notification. The control unit 41 may not perform navigation notification, and the game control board 40 may not output a navigation notification signal to the IF2 board 1200. In such a configuration, the first information output circuit 40a of the present embodiment is not used. And a means for executing a navigation notification and a means for outputting a navigation notification signal by outputting a test signal indicating a game result to the IF1 board 1100 using a common circuit. Regardless of whether obtain, it is possible to share the circuit for outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game against IF1 substrate 1100 in the gaming control board 40.

  In the present embodiment, the display signal and the in-navigation signal are input to the second information output circuit 40b, and only the information related to the navigation notification is extracted from the display signal by the conversion circuit in the second information output circuit 40b, and the navigation notification is performed. The signal is generated and the navigation notification signal is transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 board 1200. However, the main control unit 41 directly generates a signal including only information related to the navigation notification. The signal may be transmitted to the IF2 substrate 1200 from the second information output circuit 40b by inputting the signal to the second information output circuit 40b.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs as a navigation alerting | reporting signal using all the one part data of the 1st internal winning command, 2nd internal winning command, and pushing order command which are transmitted with respect to the sub-control part 91. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to generate a signal only for outputting a navigation notification signal. As such a configuration, for example, the main control unit 41 can transmit a push order command to the IF2 control unit 1203, and the IF2 control unit 1203 identifies a navigation number based on the push order command, and A stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels stop in accordance with the navigation number, and a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be pulled in for the corresponding stop reel is output. It is good also as composition to do.

  Further, in this embodiment, the lighting mode for turning on the indicators 12L and 12R by the navigation notification is that the indicators 12L and 12R are turned on by one lighting mode at the time of winning the role to be notified, from the first stop. Although all stop orders up to the third stop can be specified, the drive signal for turning on the indicators 12L and 12R is branched in this lighting mode and transmitted to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1200. The lighting mode for turning on the indicators 12L and 12R by navigation notification shows the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to be stopped next, and then switches the lighting mode every time the stop operation is performed, thereby sequentially changing the stop order. It may be configured to notify so that it can be specified. In such a configuration, it is possible to specify all stop orders from the first stop to the third stop when the notification target combination is won. It is preferable that the main control unit 41 generates the signal and transmits it to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1200, so that the test apparatus 1300 is notified by the navigation notification at an earlier stage. It is possible to specify the stopping order.

  In this embodiment, the stop operation mode (stop order and stop operation timing) that is advantageous for the player is notified as the navigation notification, but the advantage for the player does not change as an effect. However, a configuration may be adopted in which navigation notification for performing a reel stop operation in a predetermined stop operation mode is performed. As such a configuration, for example, as one replaying player who wins a replay regardless of the stop order and is given a replay, the operation is performed in one stop order (for example, right middle left stop order). When the combination of symbols 1 (for example, “red 7-red 7-red 7”) is stopped and the stop operation is performed in the other stop order (for example, stop order of left middle right), the first symbol In a configuration in which a combination of symbols different from the combination (for example, “Replay-Replay-Replay”) is stopped, when the main control unit 41 decides to stop the first symbol combination as an effect. When the navigation number indicating one stop order is output and it is determined not to stop the combination of the first symbols, the navigation number indicating the other stop order is output. IF2 control to stop the combination of 1 symbol 1203 identifies a navigation number based on the push order command, outputs a stop reel designation signal in the order of the stop order of the reels according to the navigation number, and a configuration pattern corresponding to the navigation number for the corresponding stop reel By outputting a stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which it can be pulled in, a stop operation close to a slot machine on the market can be performed even by a test by the test apparatus 1300.

  Further, with such a configuration, for example, a configuration in which the advantage after the next game is changed on condition that the combination of the first symbols is stopped (the combination of the first symbols is stopped). A configuration for shifting to a predetermined gaming state, a configuration in which the number of games controlled by the AT is increased by stopping the combination of the first symbols, etc.), and the first symbol combination by the navigation number Even in the configuration in which the stop operation mode for stopping the player is suggested to the player, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order of the reel stop sequence corresponding to the navigation number, and the corresponding stop reel is configured according to the navigation number By outputting a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which a symbol can be drawn, a payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained by a test by the test apparatus 1300.

  Further, by adopting such a configuration, for example, a combination having the same degree of advantage (for example, replay), a combination constituted by a combination of the first symbols and a combination constituted by the combination of the second symbols. In the case of winning in the internal lottery, a stop operation mode capable of winning the combination of the first symbol combination in order to stop the reel of the first symbol combination as an effect is shown. When the navigation number is output, the stop operation position at which the stop reel designation signal is output in the order of the stop of the reel according to the navigation number, and the configuration symbols corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn in for the corresponding stop reel By outputting a stop execution position signal indicating, the reel is stopped at a content close to the content of the reel stop mode stopped in the slot machine on the market by the test by the test apparatus 1300. It is possible.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine information display 50 is mounted on the gaming control board 40 as described above, and information necessary for judging the gambling ability of the gaming machine is displayed. As shown in FIG. 52, the game control board 40 is attached to the housing 1a in a state of being accommodated in a board case 120a formed of a transparent resin, and the gaming machine information display 50 includes the game control board 40. The display contents can be visually recognized through the substrate case 120a while being accommodated in the substrate case 120a and attached to the housing 1a.

  For this reason, the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 can be visually recognized through the substrate case 120a with the front door 1b opened. Moreover, the visibility of the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is not hindered inside the housing 1a. Specifically, in the display side position of the gaming machine information display 50, there are no parts such as reels provided in the slot machine 1 and other boards, and the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 is not provided. The wirings that connect the electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 do not pass through the positions. In addition, in the board case 120a for storing the game control board 40 on which the gaming machine information display 50 is mounted, an entry part for writing a seal sticker or an opening person, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40 Such as a label on which the information is displayed, a sticking part to which the label is stuck, a display part on which the information is printed or engraved, a heat radiating hole, a heat radiating fan, or the like. It is provided avoiding the position on the display side.

  In addition, the board case 120a is sealed after the game control board 40 is accommodated, and in the sealed state, the board case 120a cannot be released without being released without leaving a trace. It has become. As a sealing method, there are a method of sealing a sealing piece with a one-way screw, welding a part of a case, or sticking a seal seal that remains after peeling. Thereby, the connection line connecting the gaming machine information display 50 and the gaming control board 40 is disconnected, and the gaming machine information display 50 mounted on the gaming control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a displays correctly. It is possible to prevent the contents from being displayed or to prevent a fraud in which visibility is hindered by sticking a sticker or the like on the display surface of the gaming machine information display 50.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a combined payout ratio between past 6000 games, and an accessory payout ratio between past 6000 games. The gaming machine information display 50 displays an advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, a combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, an accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and an advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. Take control.

  The advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games is the ratio of the number of games controlled to the advantageous section related to AT among the past 6000 games. The advantageous interval related to the AT is a period from the time when the AT is won in the AT non-winning state to the time when all the AT controls associated with the selected AT are completed and the AT shifts to the non-AT. The advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games is a game controlled in the advantageous section related to AT with respect to the total cumulative number of games, which is the cumulative number of games since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. Number ratio. The combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the number of medals paid out during the BB controlled between the past 6000 games in the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the number of consecutive combinations to be paid out. The bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the amount paid out during BB and RB controlled during the past 6000 games, which occupy the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the number of paid-out items, which is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the payout during the advantageous section related to the AT controlled during the past 6000 games in the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts that is the cumulative number of medals awarded. The combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts is due to factory shipments or for some reason in the total cumulative payout number, which is the total of the number of medals paid out since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason. This is the ratio of the combined payout number that is the total of the number of medals paid out during the BB controlled from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c to the present. The payout ratio relative to the total cumulative number of payouts is paid out during the BB and RB controlled from the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized to the total cumulative payout at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. This is the ratio of the number of paid-out items, which is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout is the payout during the advantageous section related to the AT controlled from the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized to the present time at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. This is the ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts that is the cumulative number of medals awarded.

  In this embodiment, as a bonus, only RB and BB in which RB continuously operates are mounted. However, all types of small roles are permitted, but some reels are drawn. However, when the CT is installed, the number of medals paid out during the CT is reflected in the bonus payout ratio. When the CB is mounted, the number of medals paid out during the CB is reflected in the combined payout ratio.

  The main control unit 41, after turning on the power, during the period until the power supply is stopped, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the past 6000 games FIG. 53 shows the payout ratio between the past, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. Are switched every predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) in the display order shown in FIG.

  At this time, in the gaming machine information display 50, an abbreviation (for example, an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games in the display order 1 is displayed in the upper two digits is displayed. A1 ") is displayed, and the data to be displayed is displayed in the last two digits. In this embodiment, any ratio or ratio is displayed in%.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment shows the advantageous section ratio, the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in FIG. When the display is switched and displayed every predetermined period in the display order shown, the game is progressed and the values can be updated to new values within one period until the display is completed. Even if it exists, it restrict | limits updating to a new value, and makes a round of a display using an original value. Specifically, when the game is progressed and these values can be updated to new values within one period until the display is completed, a new value is calculated and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed. When the display is completed using the original value and the display of one cycle is completed, a new value may be set in the output buffer, and then the display may be performed with the new value. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until one cycle is completed, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is restricted by limiting the calculation for obtaining the new values. Make one round When the display of completed, performs a computation for obtaining a new value, then, it may be performed display in the gaming machine information display 50 by using the new values. By doing so, it is possible to prevent display contents such as advantageous section ratios calculated at different times from being mixed in the period until the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50 complete.

  Also, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (for example, normal) when the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games exceed a specified ratio (for example, 70%). If it is always lit, the percentage of advantageous sections will be displayed by flashing). Further, the main control unit 41 displays a display mode (for example, different from normal) when the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount exceed a specified ratio (for example, 60%). If it is normally lit, the combined payout ratio is displayed by flashing). Further, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (for example, for example, when the item payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the item payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts exceed a specified ratio (for example, 70%). If the normal lighting is always on, blinking lighting etc.) is displayed. In addition, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (for example, for example, when the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number exceed a specified ratio (for example, 80%). If normal is always lit, blinking lit etc.) will display the advantageous section payout ratio.

  In this way, when the advantageous section ratio, consecutive-action payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio exceed the specified ratio, it is displayed in a display mode different from normal, and the state of gambling is high. You can now warn you that you may be in control.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the display mode to be different from normal, for example, by blinking the upper two-digit display of the gaming machine information display 50 in a state where the 6000 game has not been reached, It is possible to recognize that the total has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 determines the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games To determine whether the data used to calculate the advantageous section payout ratio, the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is normal When it is determined that there is an abnormality (such as when the number of items paid out, the number of consecutive items paid out, or the number of advantageous sections paid out is greater than the total number of payouts, the stored value is in a certain data format (such as 01 repeat)) In this case, the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data are initialized, and a display (for example, “FFFF”) indicating that the abnormality is detected on the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed. By being adapted to inform the fact, the calculation of these data is made to recognize that it is not normally performed.

  In addition, when initializing data determined to be abnormal and data related to the data, for example, among the advantageous section ratio, the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio for the past 6000 games When it is determined that at least one of the above is abnormal, the data regarding all of these may be initialized, or only a part of the data may be initialized. If it is determined that at least one of the advantageous section ratio, the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games is abnormal, the data regarding all of them is initialized. Alternatively, only some data may be initialized. In addition, when an abnormality is determined in a part of the data for the past 6000 games, all of the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games are initialized, or conversely, a part of the data for the total cumulative number of games When an abnormality is determined, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games may be initialized.

  In addition, it is determined whether or not the data used for calculating the advantageous section ratio, the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games is normal. If this happens, a notification to that effect is made, and then a predetermined operation (for example, switches such as start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, setting key switch 37, etc. are operated in a predetermined procedure). In this way, initialization regarding the data may be performed.

  In addition, in the notification that the abnormality is determined, as described above, the gaming machine information display 50 may display that the abnormality is detected (for example, “FFFF”) and notify that fact. If an abnormality is determined, a command capable of specifying the fact is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 side informs that the abnormality is determined by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. You may do it.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 starts a period from the start of data collection until it reaches 6000 games, that is, an advantageous interval ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous interval ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, and a continuous interval between the past 6000 games. Role payout ratio, bonus payout ratio between past 6000 games, advantageous segment payout ratio between past 6000 games, continuous payout ratio relative to total cumulative payout amount, bonus payout ratio relative to total cumulative payout amount, advantageous relative to total cumulative payout number In a period when the data for calculating the section payout ratio and the like is insufficient, the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is different from the display mode after 6000 games after the start of data collection (for example, constant It can be recognized that the data for calculating the display content is insufficient. It has become.

  In this embodiment, after the power is turned on, during the period until the power supply is stopped, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 Predetermined ratios of bonuses between games, advantageous payout ratios between past 6000 games, continuous payout ratio with respect to total cumulative payouts, payout ratios with respect to total cumulative payouts, advantageous payout ratios with respect to total cumulative payouts The display is switched for each period, but is displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or a predetermined operation switch (for example, the reset / setting switch 38) is operated. Displayed only when detected, displayed when not in game, displayed during setting change status or setting confirmation Or Unishi may be or to appear after the power is turned on only for a predetermined period. Further, instead of automatically switching every predetermined period, the display contents may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the gaming machine information indicates that the data abnormality used for calculating the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is determined or that the data for calculating the display content is insufficient. Although it is the structure alert | reported using the indicator 50, the command which can specify that is transmitted to the sub-control part 91, and it may also be made to confirm with the indicator and presentation apparatus which the sub-control part 91 controls good.

  Also, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and between the past 6000 games The gaming machine information display 50 displays an advantageous section payout ratio, a combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, an accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and an advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. In addition to these displays, it is possible to recognize that the RAM 41c has been initialized by a setting change, or that a disconnection of a wiring (such as a backup power supply wiring) provided in the slot machine 1 has been detected. The contents may be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  In particular, if the setting is changed during a bonus, advantageous section or bonus carryover, the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly terminated, or the bonus being carried over is cleared, the game is defined while the bonus is carried forward It has been performed more than a few times, or an operation that intentionally ends the advantageous section has been performed (for example, in RT2 or RT3 during AT, RT1 transition replay or SB is deliberately won, or a specific symbol is stopped When an operation for shifting to RT1 is performed, that is, when a game state that is intentionally shifted from a relatively advantageous gaming state to a disadvantaged gaming state is detected, and the gaming machine information display 50 is disconnected When the possibility of not being normally connected due to the occurrence of the above is detected, the fact is notified in a identifiable manner. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal operation has been performed so that correct information is not displayed as an advantageous section ratio, an item payout ratio, a continuous combination payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc. .

  In addition, in the process of avoiding the overflow of the total cumulative data as will be described later, when the total cumulative data is initialized, the fact that the advantageous section ratio, the bonus payout ratio, It is preferable to notify in a manner different from the case where there is a possibility that the information is illegally operated so that correct information is not displayed as the combined service payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio, etc., and in this way, overflow is avoided. It is possible to recognize that the total accumulated data has been initialized by the processing to be performed separately from the initialization by an illegal operation for preventing correct information from being displayed as an advantageous section ratio or the like.

  In addition, as described above, if there is a possibility that an illegal operation is performed so that correct information is not displayed as an advantageous section ratio, an item payout ratio, a continuous combination payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc., that fact is detected. Then, the history of the detection is recorded on the main control unit 41 side, and is not notified at the time of the detection. Thereafter, a predetermined operation (for example, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, setting key switch 37, etc.) is performed. By operating the switches according to a predetermined procedure and connecting a predetermined external device such as an inspection terminal to the game control board 40), these histories are provided on the main control unit 41 side. Can be confirmed by a display (for example, gaming machine information display 50), a display (for example, liquid crystal display 51) provided on the sub-control unit 91 side, a display external to the slot machine 1, etc. It may be so.

  In addition, the settings are changed, the disconnection is detected, the connection failure of the gaming machine information display 50 is generated, and the correct section ratio, the item payout ratio, the combined service payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. are correct. There is a possibility that information may not be displayed, and as described above, there is a possibility that the information has been illegally manipulated so that correct information is not displayed as an advantageous section ratio, an item payout ratio, a combined payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc. This may be confirmed by a display device or an effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. In addition, during bonus, advantageous section or during carryover of bonus, the bonus or advantageous section was forcibly terminated, the bonus being carried over was cleared, advantageous section ratio, bonus payout ratio, The sub-control unit 91 records a history that it has been detected that there is a possibility that the information was illegally operated so that correct information is not displayed as the combined service payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio, etc. You may be able to check the history of

  Next, a method for counting and calculating data for the main control unit 41 to display such information will be described.

  The main control unit 41 aggregates and calculates information related to the slot machine 1 such as the above-described advantageous section ratio, and displays information based on the calculation result on the gaming machine information display 50 mounted on the gaming control board 40. A gaming machine information display process can be executed as the process. A program for performing the gaming machine information display process is included in the above-mentioned non-game program, and various data used by the main control unit 41 when executing the gaming machine information display process are stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b. It is remembered. The main control unit 41 uses the non-game data area of the RAM 41c as a work when executing the gaming machine information display process. Note that the non-game data area used when the main control unit 41 executes the gaming machine information display process is backed up by a backup power source, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, As long as power is supplied, the stored contents of the non-game data area are stored. In addition, the main control unit 41 performs the operation of changing the setting value as described above, whereby the data stored in the game data area of the RAM 41c is initialized, but the gaming machine information display process The non-game data area used when executing the game is not targeted for initialization when an operation for changing the set value is performed or when an initialization condition is established for another game data area. In particular, the information for summing up, calculating, and displaying information regarding the slot machine 1 such as the above-described advantageous section ratio is not initialized.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the predetermined area of the non-game data area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, a game number counter capable of counting the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is incremented by one and specified. A first game number counter that is initialized every time period (6000 games in this embodiment) elapses, and 1 is added for each game, and a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is added to a predetermined number (books). In the embodiment, a second game number counter that is initialized every time the predetermined period divided by 15) (400 games in the present embodiment) elapses is incremented by 1 for each game. A third game number counter is provided. 1st to 5th data buffer that can count 1 set of data, 1st to 5th ring buffer with 15 sets of buffers that can store 2 bytes of data in 1 set are set Has been.

  The main control unit 41 uses the first to fifth data counting buffers and the first to fifth ring buffers to determine the total number of medals awarded in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). In the specified period (6000 games in the present embodiment), in the specified period (6000 games in the present embodiment), in the specified period (6000 games in the present embodiment) In the period controlled by the BB, the number of consecutive payouts, which is the number of medals awarded, and the advantageous period controlled by the AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) (the AT controls after winning the AT) The number of medals awarded during the period from when the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is terminated), a specific period (this implementation) Is the number of games in the advantageous period controlled by the AT (the period from the time when the AT is won to the time when the AT remaining game count becomes 0 and the AT control is terminated). It is possible to count the number of game section games.

  Specifically, the main control unit 41 adds the number of medals paid out to the first data count buffer when the medals are paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role, and BB or RB In the period controlled by BB, when medals are paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role, the number of medals paid out is added to the second data count buffer, and in the period controlled by BB, When a medal is paid out in accordance with the winning of a small role, the number of medals paid out is added to the third data counting buffer, and an advantageous section controlled by AT (after winning AT and then controlled by AT) When the medals are paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role during the period from when the AT game is reduced to 0 and the AT control is ended), the number of medals paid out is set to the fourth number. Add to data counting buffer When a game is played during an advantageous period controlled by the AT (the period from when the AT is won to when the AT is controlled until the AT remaining game count becomes 0 and the AT is terminated) One game is added to the fifth data counting buffer. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to add the number of medals to the first to fourth data counting buffers at the timing when occurrence of the small prize winning is determined. The timing at which the number of medals is added to the data count buffer may be the timing at which medals are actually given due to the occurrence of a small winning combination (addition of credits or detection of actual medal payout).

  Then, every time it is specified that the predetermined period has passed based on the second game number counter, a predetermined set of buffers of the first to fifth ring buffers (previously updated set + 1 set buffer) When the first or last updated set is the 15th set, the first set buffer) is initialized, and the first to fifth data count counter values are set to the predetermined set of the first to fifth ring buffers. In addition to adding to the buffer, the first to fifth data count buffer values are respectively added to the 3-byte aggregate data areas A ′ to D ′ and F ′ provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. Also, the 3-byte aggregate data areas a ′ to d ′ and f ′ provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and all the first to fifteenth sets of the first to fifth ring buffers are initialized. The set buffer data is sequentially added to the corresponding aggregated data areas a ′ to d ′ and f ′. Thereafter, the first to fifth data buffers are initialized. Also, the total data area E ′ is updated to the value of the third game number counter.

  By performing these processes, the data of the predetermined set of the first to fifth ring buffers, the total data areas a ′ to d ′, f ′, and A ′ to F ′ are updated for each predetermined period. The information will be updated.

  Further, each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, the main control unit 41 updates the aggregate data areas a ′ to d ′ and A ′ to D ′ to the latest information, and then Of these, it is determined whether or not the data set in the aggregate data area a′A ′ has reached 3 bytes. For data that has not reached 3 bytes, the data in the aggregate data areas a ′ and A ′ are determined. The 2-byte secondary calculation data areas a and A provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c are set. On the other hand, an extraction process for extracting predetermined 16-bit data is performed on the data reaching 3 bytes, and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data areas a and A. As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the extraction process, the highest rank is specified by referring to the data in the total data area, and the highest rank data indicating the highest rank is determined in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. Set to area. Then, 16-bit data below the highest order is extracted.

  In addition, for b ′ to d ′ in the total data area, a primary operation of 3 bytes provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c is obtained by multiplying the data in the total data areas b ′ to d ′ by 100 respectively. Data areas b ″ to d ″ are set respectively. Thereafter, it is referred to whether or not the extraction process has been performed for the total data area a. When the extraction process has not been performed for the total data area a, the data of the total data area b ″ to d ″ is stored in the RAM 41c. They are set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas b to d provided in the game data area. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed for the total data area a, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the total data area a is specified, and 16-bit data below the highest level is specified. Are extracted and set in the secondary calculation data areas b to d.

  In addition, for B ′ to D ′ in the total data area, a primary calculation of 3 bytes provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c is obtained by multiplying the data in the total data areas B ′ to D ′ by 100 respectively. Data areas B "to D" are set respectively. Thereafter, whether or not the extraction process has been performed for the total data area A is referred to. If the extraction process has not been performed for the total data area A, the data of the total data area B ″ to D ″ is stored in the RAM 41c. They are set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas B to D provided in the game data area. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed for the total data area A, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the total data area A is specified, and 16-bit data below the highest level is specified. Are extracted and set in the secondary calculation data areas B to D.

  Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data in the secondary calculation data area b by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, so that the ratio of the total payout number in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is obtained. By calculating and dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area c by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of bonuses in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated. By dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area c by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of consecutive combinations in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated, and the secondary calculation data area By dividing the data of d by the data of the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the advantageous section payout number in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated.

  Further, by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area B by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the ratio of the total payout number in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data in the secondary calculation data area B is calculated. Then, by dividing by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the ratio of the total number of bonuses in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data in the secondary calculation data area C is converted into the data in the secondary calculation data area A. By dividing, the ratio of the cumulative number of consecutive combinations in the slot machine 1 is calculated. By dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area D by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the total in the slot machine 1 is calculated. The ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts is calculated.

  The main control unit 41 updates the total data areas f ′, E ′, and F ′ to the latest information each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and then calculates the total data in the total data area. It is determined whether or not the data set in the area E ′ has reached 3 bytes. If the data has not reached 3 bytes, the data of the total data area E ′ is provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. The 2-byte secondary calculation data area E is set. On the other hand, when it reaches 3 bytes, the extraction process is performed, and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data area E.

  For the total data area f ′, a value obtained by multiplying the data in the total data area f ′ by 100 is set in a 3-byte primary calculation data area f ″ provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. Then, it is determined whether or not the data set in the total data area f ″ has reached 3 bytes. If the data has not reached 3 bytes, the data in the total data area f ″ is stored in the non-game data in the RAM 41c. Set to the 2-byte secondary calculation data area f provided in the area, whereas if it reaches 3 bytes, the extraction process is performed and the extracted data is set to the corresponding secondary calculation data area f. .

  Further, referring to whether or not the extraction process has been performed for the total data area f, and when the extraction process has not been performed for the total data area f, 6000, which is the number of games in a predetermined period, is set to the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. Are set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data area g provided in the. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed for the total data area f, the extraction process is performed for 6000, which is the number of games in a predetermined period, the top level specified in the extraction process for the total data area f is specified, Data of 16 bits below the most significant are extracted and set in the secondary operation data area g.

  For the total data area F ′, a value obtained by multiplying the data in the total data area F ′ by 100 is set in the 3-byte primary calculation data area F ″ provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. Then, referring to whether or not the extraction process has been performed for the total data area E, and if the extraction process has not been performed for the total data area E, the data of the total data area F ″ is stored in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the provided 2-byte secondary calculation data area F. On the other hand, when the extraction process is performed for the total data area E, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the total data area E is specified, and 16-bit data below the highest level is specified. Is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data area F.

  Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data in the secondary calculation data area F by the data in the secondary calculation data area E, thereby calculating the ratio of the advantageous section game count in the total number of games in the slot machine 1. Then, by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area f by the secondary calculation data area g, the ratio of the number of advantageous section games in the predetermined period is calculated.

  The main control unit 41 refers to the corresponding area of the secondary calculation data area every predetermined time, and determines the ratio of the total payout number for the predetermined period, the ratio of the total payout number for the total period, and the combined payout number for the predetermined period. Percentage of the number of items to be paid out for a given period, rate of the number of paid-off items for a given period, rate of the total number of consecutive-items to be paid out, rate of the total number of items to be paid out By specifying the ratio and setting it in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50, it is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  The main control unit 41 calculates secondary calculation data based on the data in the first to fifth ring buffers when a predetermined period elapses, that is, updates the secondary calculation data every time the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, until the predetermined period elapses, the previously calculated secondary calculation data is maintained, and based on the secondary calculation data, the gaming machine information display 50 displays the total payout number and the like. After the elapse of time, until the next predetermined period elapses, the total payout number and the like when the previous predetermined period elapses are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  In addition to the total number of payouts and the like described above, the number of advantageous section games and the total number of advantageous section games for a predetermined period are specified and set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 for each predetermined time. It is good also as a structure displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the total accumulated data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, a process for avoiding the overflow is executed, Delete related data once.

  Specifically, when the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined number, the total cumulative data that has reached the predetermined number and data related to the total cumulative data are initialized. At this time, the data related to the total accumulated data that has reached the specified number is all the data used in the calculation (in this embodiment, the total number of paid items, the number of bonus items to be paid, the number of consecutively paid items, the number of games, the advantageous interval game All of the total data of the number of times) may be initialized, or a part of relatively highly relevant data (for example, the total data A ′ of the total number of payouts reaches the specified number as the total cumulative data) Includes the combined data B ′ ratio of the combined payout number used together with the total data A ′ in the calculation of the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, When the total data D ′ of the advantageous section payout number and the total data E ′ of the number of games as the total accumulated data reach the specified number, they are used together with the total data E ′ when calculating the advantageous section ratio (F / E). Advantageous section game times Summing data F ') may be to initialize.

  When the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined specified number, the total cumulative data that has reached the predetermined number and the data related to the total cumulative data are decreased by a predetermined ratio (for example, the total cumulative data By multiplying the current value by 0.5, etc.), it is possible to avoid overflow of the total cumulative data. At this time, the total cumulative data reaching the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data It is possible to reduce all of the data at a predetermined ratio, or reduce the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and some data that is relatively related to the total cumulative data at a predetermined ratio. Anyway.

  In addition, when the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined number, the total cumulative data that has reached the predetermined number and the data related to the total cumulative data are initialized or reduced, etc. The specified number may be the maximum value of the total cumulative data (the maximum value that can be stored in each total data area (3 bytes) of the RAM 41c), or a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value of the total cumulative data ( The value may be a good value within 3 bytes, such as “16000000 (decimal number)”.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the total accumulated data of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, it is related once as a process for avoiding the overflow. Although it is the structure which erases data, the structure which stops a count may be sufficient, without erasing related data.

  Further, the data displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 may be executed for each game, or may be executed only for a game in which a winning has occurred.

  Since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform calculation after the decimal point, in this embodiment, the calculation is performed using the following first calculation method. In the first calculation method, first, the value of the numerator is multiplied by 100. Then, the value multiplied by 100 is divided by the denominator value. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing calculation after the decimal point. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Note that the following second calculation method may be used as a calculation method performed by a microcomputer that cannot perform calculation after the decimal point. In the second calculation method, first, the denominator value is divided by 100. Then, the value of the numerator is divided by the value divided by 100. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing calculation after the decimal point. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  Further, a microcomputer used in a gaming machine can only perform a calculation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate the calculation, lower bits are truncated as necessary. By using such a calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in a gaming machine becomes easy, but an error occurs. However, as the period for calculation becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original numerical value. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the value to be calculated is 2 bytes or less, the calculation is performed using the value as it is without truncating the lower bits, and the value to be calculated is 2 bytes. When exceeding, the calculation is performed using the value obtained by rounding down the lower bits.

  In the conventional slot machine, the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value.

  However, in such a conventional method, it is difficult to confirm whether or not it is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value after being installed in a game store.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the specific period occupying the total number of medals given in the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment, or the period from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason to the present). Since the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are ratios of the total number of medals awarded during the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section), are calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. Even after the slot machine 1 is shipped to the market, it can be confirmed whether or not the slot machine 1 is controlled to an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value.

  In the present embodiment, the number of games controlled in the advantageous period (advantageous section) in a specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason until the present). Since the advantageous section ratio, which is a ratio, is calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, it is possible to confirm the information indicating the degree of gambling after being shipped to the market.

  In the present embodiment, the advantage is the ratio of the number of games controlled in the advantageous period in the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason until the present). The section ratio is calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, but it is a specific period (the period from the past 6000 games, factory shipment, or the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason to the present). The ratio of the number of games controlled by bonuses such as BB, RB, and the like may be calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, and even in such a configuration, the degree of euphoria after being shipped to the market Can be confirmed.

  In the present embodiment, the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout for a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason until the present). When calculating the ratio, the combined service payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by different calculation methods depending on whether or not these source data satisfy the predetermined condition. The optimal calculation method can be selected according to the data to be obtained. For example, if the total number of payouts in the specified period and the total number of payouts in the advantageous section of the specific period are within 2 bytes, the data used as the basis of calculation is used as it is without being processed. While calculating the section payout ratio, if the total number of payouts in the specified period and the total number of payouts in the advantageous section of the specified period exceed 2 bytes, the data that is the basis of calculation is processed into data within 2 bytes. By calculating the combined service payout ratio, the serviced item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the combined service payout ratio, the serviced goods payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated by an optimum calculation method with less error.

  In this embodiment, the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous interval) in the first period to the total number of medals awarded in the first period (between the past 6000 games). The combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, and the total number of medals awarded in the second period (from the factory shipment or from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason to the present) The combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded during the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the second period, are calculated, respectively. In addition to being displayed on the display device 50, the combined payout in the second period is also calculated when calculating the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period. Even when calculating the ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by a common calculation method. The method of calculating the combined service payout ratio, the serviced item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in FIG. 5 may be different from the method of calculating the combined service payout ratio, serviced item payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio in the second period. good. For example, in the above example, when calculating the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the numerator is multiplied by 100 so that the result becomes%, but the denominator is increased by 1/100. If the result is%, the total number of payouts in the first period can be kept within 2 bytes. In such a configuration, when calculating the combined payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period, the data that is the basis of the calculation is used as it is without being processed. While calculating the ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, when calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the second period, the calculation source data is 2 By processing the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio after processing into data within bytes, the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, An advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated.

  In the present embodiment, the combined payout ratio, the payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout for a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason until the present). Since the data used for calculating the ratio is stored separately from the total number of payouts in the specified period and the total number of payouts in the advantageous period in the specified period, the combined payout ratio, the item payout ratio, and the advantageous period in the specified period The payout ratio can be calculated by a simple procedure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined game in which the number of specific games is divided by a predetermined number (15) in calculating the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games). 15 sets for storing the total number of payouts for a period of 400 games, the number of payouts for a period of a predetermined number of games, the number of consecutive payouts for a period of a predetermined number of games, and the number of advantageous sections of a predetermined number of games The total number of payouts in a specific game number period is obtained by adding together the total payout number, the item payout number, the continuous function payout number, and the advantageous section payout number stored in these ring buffers. , Calculate the number of items to be paid out, the number of consecutive items to be paid out, and the number of advantageous sections to be paid out. Is adapted to calculate the section payout ratio, continuous combination payout ratio in the last number of a particular game, the character object payout ratio, it is possible to easily calculate the advantageous section payout ratio.

  Further, in this embodiment, in calculating the advantageous section ratio in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games), the advantageous section in the period of the predetermined number of games (400 games) obtained by dividing the specific number of games by the predetermined number (15). A ring buffer consisting of 15 sets of buffers each storing the number of games is provided, and by calculating the number of games in the advantageous section stored in these ring buffers, the number of games in the advantageous section in the specific game number period is calculated, The number of games in the advantageous section in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games) is calculated, and the number of games in the advantageous section in the most recent specific number of games can be easily calculated.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the housing 1a in a state of being accommodated in a board case 120a formed of a transparent resin, and the gaming machine information display 50 includes the game control board 40. The display contents can be visually recognized through the substrate case 120a in a state of being accommodated in the substrate case 120a and attached to the housing 1a. In addition, the board case 120a is sealed after the game control board 40 is accommodated, and in the sealed state, the board case 120a cannot be released without being released without leaving a trace. It has become. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine information display 50 from being tampered with.

  In the present embodiment, a game RAM area in which data corresponding to the progress of the game is stored in the RAM 41c, and a combination payout ratio, a combination payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc. are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. A non-game RAM area in which data used for the game is stored, and when the initialization condition of the RAM 41c is satisfied by the transition to the setting change state or the like, the data in the game RAM area is initialized while the non-game RAM area is Since the data in the RAM area is not initialized, even when the initialization condition is satisfied, the payout ratio, the payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. can be calculated and displayed in consideration of the previous data. .

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The game machine information display 50 is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the display content can be visually recognized from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a. In addition, the board case 120a enclosed in the game control board 40 is arranged inside the housing 1a. Since the inside is configured not to disturb the visibility of the gaming machine information display 50, it is possible to confirm the display of the gaming machine information display 50 only by opening the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. Yes, based on the display of the gaming machine information display 50, it can be easily confirmed whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state based on the design value.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, the setting is changed during bonus, advantageous section or bonus carryover, the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the bonus being carried over is cleared, While the bonus is being carried over, the game has been played more than the specified number, the operation to intentionally end the advantageous section, or the connection to the gaming machine information display 50 is not possible. In other words, it is detected that there is a possibility that an illegal operation has been performed so that correct information is not displayed as an advantageous section ratio, an item payout ratio, a continuous combination payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, etc. It is detected that there is an event that may cause the gaming machine information display 50 to not correctly display the correct information such as the advantageous section ratio, the item payout ratio, the combined part payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio. Therefore, fraud that prevents such information from being properly displayed can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. When the data such as the total payout number used when calculating the combined payout ratio, the item payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio reaches a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, it is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50. Used to calculate the combined payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio by executing processing that avoids overflow and deleting related data once. If the data such as the total number of payments used when calculating the combined payout ratio etc. exceeds the upper limit, it will be avoided. The payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The main control unit 41 is configured to display information such as a continuous combination payout ratio, a combination item payout ratio, and an advantageous section payout ratio in the predetermined display order in the gaming machine information display 50. (In this embodiment, every 30 seconds) and display, and within a period until the display of these combined payout ratios, etc. is completed, Even if these values can be updated to new values, updating to the new values is restricted and the display is cycled using the original values. A lot of information such as payout ratios can be displayed efficiently, and information updated at the same time is displayed as multiple types of information displayed in one cycle, so different times in one cycle Can be prevented from being mixed.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The main control unit 41 is configured to display on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a combined payout ratio between past 6000 games, and between past 6000 games. The payout ratio of the past, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio relative to the total cumulative payout ratio, and the total cumulative payout number It is determined whether or not the data used for calculating the advantageous payout ratio and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts is normal. If at least one of these data is determined to be abnormal, it is determined to be abnormal. The data and the data related to the data are initialized, and an indication that an abnormality has been detected (for example, “FFFF”) is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 to notify the fact. Because the data necessary to calculate the advantageous section ratio etc. has been initialized, the calculation of these data is not performed normally, and the possibility that the advantageous section ratio etc. is not a normal value is recognized. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 identifies the total number of medals granted by the main control unit 41 during the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present). A game that is mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The main control unit 41 is configured to display on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 is stopped at the timing at which occurrence of the small role winning is determined according to the progress of the game, that is, the symbol combination reel of the small role at which medals are paid out. The medals are actually paid out and the number of medals is added to the data counting buffer without waiting for the payout to be completed. Communicating combination payout ratio without payout associated with winning a role waits for the completion, character object payout ratio, it is possible to update the data used to calculate the preferred interval payout ratio.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to add the number of medals to the data counting buffer at the timing when occurrence of the small winning combination is determined according to the progress of the game. The timing at which the number is added may be a configuration in which a medal is actually given by the occurrence of a small role winning (addition of credit or detection of actual medal payout), and such a configuration is used. Thus, when the medals are stopped on the symbol combination reel of the small role, after the medals are actually paid out and the payout is completed, the combined payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio It is possible to update the data used for the calculation of.

  As mentioned above, although Example 1 and the modification of this invention were demonstrated with drawing, this invention is not limited to these Example 1 and a modification, The change and addition in the range which does not deviate from the main point of this invention Needless to say, this is included in the present invention.

  In the first embodiment and the modification, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine in which bets are set using medals and credits as game values has been described. However, bets using game balls as game values are described. The present invention may also be applied to a slot machine that sets a bet or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credit as a gaming value to set a bet amount. In the case of using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the first embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls when a winning occurs. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out all of utility values.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine as a gaming machine is applied. However, the gaming machine is not limited to the slot machine 1, and is not limited to the slot machine 1. May be applied.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 can display the number of paid-out medals on the game auxiliary display 12 when the medals are paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role. When the number of medals is less than 10, one-digit number indicating the number of medals paid out is displayed on the display 12R in the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of medals paid out is 10 or more. In this case, the first digit (first digit) indicating the number of medals paid out is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary indicator 12, and the second digit (tenth digit). Is displayed on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12, and when the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is mainly displayed. 12R is used. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 can display the navigation number (0 to 13) on the game auxiliary display 12 when performing the navigation notification. If the navigation number is less than 10, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number. A one-digit number indicating the number is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, and when the navigation number is 10 or more, the first digit (the first digit) indicating the navigation number is used as a game assist. The display 12 is displayed on the display 12R, and the second digit (ten's place) is displayed on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12. In the game auxiliary display 12, When the navigation number is displayed, the display 12R is mainly used in the game auxiliary display 12 as in the case of displaying the number of medals to be paid out.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment uses the first display device among the plurality of display devices 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display device 12 to pay out medals. The navigation number is displayed using mainly the second display device among the plurality of display devices 12L and 12R.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), when performing navigation notification, when the navigation number is less than 10, the main control unit 41 displays a one-digit number indicating the navigation number as a game assist display. When the navigation number is 10 or more, the first digit (the first digit) indicating the navigation number is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12. In addition, by displaying the second digit (ten's place) on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12. Of these, the display 12L is mainly used.

  As described above, in the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment, the winning combination with the medal payout is won in the internal lottery, and the combination of symbols of the winning combination is on the winning line LN of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In this configuration, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out to the player, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a navigation notification that notifies a stop operation mode advantageous to the player is performed. In the game auxiliary indicator 12 in which the main control unit 41 directly controls display, the number of medals paid out to the player is displayed on the game auxiliary indicator 12 and navigation is performed. When notifying, it is a structure which can display the navigation number which can identify the stop operation aspect advantageous for a player.

  In such a configuration, the number of medals paid out to the player on one game auxiliary display 12 and the stop operation mode advantageous to the player are both displayed. There is a risk that.

  On the other hand, the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the medal payout number as the predetermined content by the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment includes a plurality of indicators 12L and 12R, and the main control unit 41 has the predetermined content. As a display content different from the above, a navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, so that the game auxiliary is a display means for displaying predetermined content By displaying the navigation number using the display device 12, it is possible to display the predetermined contents and the navigation number without providing a new display means, and the main control unit 41 can display the plurality of display devices 12L and 12R. Of these, a predetermined content is displayed mainly using the display 12R as the first display, and the display 12 is mainly used as the second display among the plurality of displays 12L and 12R. Since displaying the navigation numbers with, it is possible to prevent the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a display unit or a navigation ID, whether a predetermined content, will be misidentified.

  Note that the stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player that can be identified by the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by the navigation notification is an operation mode operated in any one of a plurality of operation sequences, The operation mode may be an operation mode operated at any one of the different operation timings, or may be an operation mode based on a combination thereof.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the main control unit 41 displays the medal payout number as a predetermined content on the game auxiliary indicator 12, only the number indicating the medal payout number is configured in the game auxiliary indicator 12. Of the plurality of indicators 12L and 12R to be displayed mainly on the first indicator 12R, that is, a configuration in which the predetermined content is displayed using only the first indicator. In addition to the first display, a configuration in which predetermined contents are displayed by using a display other than the first display, for example, a number indicating the number of medals to be paid out is mainly displayed on the first display 12R. The payout symbol (for example, “=” or “”) indicating that the payout is being performed may be displayed on the second display 12L.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 uses a plurality of indicators 12 </ b> L constituting the game auxiliary display 12 only for the numbers indicating the navigation numbers. 12R is mainly configured to be displayed on the second display 12L, that is, the navigation number is displayed using only the second display. When the navigation number is displayed, the second display In addition, the navigation number is displayed by using a display device other than the second display device, for example, when performing navigation notification, the navigation number of the display device 12L and the display device 12R of the game auxiliary display device 12 Is displayed on the display 12R different from the display 12L that mainly displays the navigation number and the navigation number indicating that the navigation number is being displayed (for example, “.” Shown in FIG. 56 (b), “=” Shown in FIG. 56 (c) Or the like may be configured to display. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the content displayed on the second display 12L is the content corresponding to the operation mode from the content displayed on the first display 12R.

  Further, when performing navigation notification, in the configuration in which the in-navigation symbol is displayed on the game auxiliary indicator 12, the in-navigation symbol may be a fixed display or a display that changes at every predetermined timing. For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the main control unit 41 may be configured to change the navigation in progress symbol every time a stop operation is performed, or the navigation in progress symbol may be changed every predetermined time. It may be configured to change. In such a configuration, the in-navigation symbol can be easily recognized by changing the in-navigation symbol. Further, in the configuration in which the navigation in progress symbol is changed every time a stop operation is performed, whether the reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop operation being performed is the first stop operation, depending on the display mode of the displayed navigation in progress symbol. The second stop operation or the third stop operation can be grasped.

  The main control unit 41 according to the second embodiment displays a navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as display content different from the predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to display the medal payout number, which is information relating to the result of the game, as a predetermined content, and the navigation number for notifying the operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed during the game. On the other hand, since the predetermined content is displayed after the game is over, the display periods do not overlap.

  In the second embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as display contents different from the predetermined contents on the game auxiliary display 12. The medal payout number as the predetermined content and the navigation number different from the predetermined content are configured so that the periods displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 do not overlap. The display content different from the predetermined content may be content that may overlap the display period, or may be content that does not overlap. For example, the display period may overlap. In the configuration in which the main control unit 41 is controlled to an error state when an abnormality is detected, and controls related to the game such as paying out medals in the error state are disabled. , When that control to the error state as different display content from the predetermined content, the type of error that has occurred may be configured to display an error code that can be identified game auxiliary display 12. Even in such a configuration, an error code is displayed mainly using the second display 12L different from the first display 12R used mainly when displaying the number of medals to be paid out, so that the game auxiliary display It can be prevented that the display content displayed in 12 is an error code or whether or not the dull payout number as the predetermined content is misidentified.

  In the predetermined area of the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 according to the second embodiment, lighting mode data, which is display data for displaying predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, is determined in advance for each display content. The mode data table is stored, and the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number by the navigation notification as the display content other than the predetermined content even when the game auxiliary display 12 displays the payout number of medals as the predetermined content. Even in the case of using the common lighting mode data stored in the lighting mode data table, it is possible to display predetermined display contents on the respective display units 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display unit 12. It is possible to reduce the capacity of display data for displaying predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

  In a conventional gaming machine, the game machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state for a player based on a predetermined design value. However, after the game machine is installed in a game store, it is based on a predetermined design value. Therefore, it is difficult to confirm whether the control is advantageous.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a slot machine capable of confirming whether or not it is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value. And

The gaming machine of configuration 1-1 is
In a game machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
A game value giving means for giving a game value (medal);
Advantageous control means for controlling advantageously for the player (control of BB, RB, advantageous section by the main control unit 41),
In a specific period (total number of payouts) for a specific period, which is the total number of game values given during a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or for some reason until the RAM 41c data is initialized) The total number of specified advantageous periods (total number of consecutive payouts, number of items paid out, and number of advantageous sections paid out), which is the total number of game values given during the advantageously controlled period (BB, RB, advantageous section) of the occupying specific period ) To calculate a specific advantageous period grant ratio (a combined payout ratio, an accessory payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio),
A notifying means (game machine information display 50) for notifying the specific advantageous period granting ratio (joint payout ratio, bonus payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio) calculated by the calculating means;
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, the specific advantageous period grant that is the total number of game values given in the advantageously controlled period among the specific periods that occupy the total number of game values given in the specific period The specific advantageous period grant ratio, which is the ratio of the total number, is calculated and notified in an identifiable manner by the notification means, so whether or not it is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value even after being shipped to the market. Can be confirmed.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-2 is the gaming machine described in configuration 1-1,
The notification means (game machine information display 50) is configured so as not to disturb the visibility (in the inside of the housing 1a, for example, a component such as a reel at the display side position of the game machine information display 50). In general, no other boards are provided, and wiring that connects electronic components does not pass through.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the visibility of the notification unit is not hindered, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the control is advantageously controlled based on the design value.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 1-1 or 1-2,
An event has occurred that may cause the specified advantageous period grant ratio to become inadequate (for example, the bonus or advantageous area is forcibly terminated during a bonus, advantageous period, or bonus carryover) Detection means for detecting that the bonus has been cleared, that the bonus has been carried over, that the game has been played more than the specified number, and that the operation to intentionally terminate the advantageous section has been performed). It is characterized by providing.
According to this feature, it is detected that an event has occurred in which the notified specific advantageous period grant ratio may not be appropriate. Can be prevented.

A gaming machine according to configuration 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-3,
Excess avoidance means (overflow is avoided) in which the numerical value (total data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for the calculation means to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio exceeds the upper limit value (numerical value that can be expressed in 3 bytes). It is characterized by having processing to avoid.
According to this feature, it is avoided that the numerical value necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio exceeds the upper limit value, so the numerical value necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio exceeds the upper limit value. Even if the situation ends up, the specific advantageous period grant ratio can be notified.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-1 to 1-4,
The notification means notifies a plurality of types of information including a specific advantageous period grant ratio by switching periodically (every 30 seconds) and updated at the same time as a plurality of types of information notified in one cycle. It is characterized by notifying.
According to this feature, since a plurality of types of information including a specific advantageous period grant ratio are periodically switched and notified, a large amount of information can be notified efficiently, and a plurality of types notified in one cycle Since the information updated at the same time is notified as the information, the information of different periods can be prevented from being mixed in one cycle.

A gaming machine of Configuration 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any of Configurations 1-1 to 1-5,
Initialization notifying means (game machine information display 50) for notifying that the calculation means has initialized a numerical value (total data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio;
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, since it is notified by the initialization notification means that the numerical value necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio has been initialized, the numerical value necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio is It is possible to recognize the possibility that the specific advantageous period grant ratio is not a normal value by being initialized.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-1 to 1-6,
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
A display result can be derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portions (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a winning can be generated according to the display result,
A numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for the calculating means to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio;
The numerical value updating means waits for the completion of the provision of the game value (medal) when the display result (the combination of the symbols of the small role) is derived in which the prize winning accompanied with the provision of the game value (medal) is derived. It is characterized in that the numerical values (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio (joint payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio) are updated.
According to this feature, when a display result in which a winning prize is generated is derived, updating a numerical value necessary for calculating a specific advantageous period granting ratio without waiting for a game value grant to be completed. Can do.

A gaming machine having configuration 1-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-6,
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
A display result can be derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portions (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a winning can be generated according to the display result,
A numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for the calculating means to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio;
The numerical value updating means waits for the completion of the provision of the game value (medal) when the display result (the combination of symbols of the small role) is derived in which the award winning accompanied with the provision of the game value (medal) is derived. It is characterized by updating the numerical values (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio (joint payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio).
According to this feature, when a display result in which an award winning is derived is derived, a numerical value necessary for calculating a specific advantageous period grant ratio after the game value is actually granted can be updated. it can.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-1 to 1-8,
Predetermined total number for storing a predetermined period total number (total number of payouts) that is the total number of game values given in a predetermined period (400 games) divided by a predetermined number (15) over a specific period (past 6000 games) The storage area and the total number of given advantageous periods (the number of consecutive payouts, the number of combinations) that are the total number of game values given in the period (BB, RB, advantageous period) that is advantageously controlled in the predetermined period (400 games) A predetermined advantageous period grant total number storage area for storing the number of items paid out and the number of advantageous section payouts), each having a predetermined number (15) or more (a ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers),
The calculating means calculates a predetermined period total number (total number of payouts during the past 6000 games) for a predetermined period stored in a predetermined number total storage area (ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers). (The number of payouts) is summed up, and a predetermined advantageous period granting total number storage area (a predetermined advantageous period granting total number (the number of consecutive combination payouts between the past 6000 games, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of advantageous section payouts)) It is characterized in that it is calculated by adding together the total number of predetermined advantageous period grants (joint payout number, accessory payout number, advantageous section payout number) stored in a ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily calculate the total number of specific period grants and the total number of specific advantageous period grants in the most recent specific period.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-1 to 1-9,
Comprising storage means (RAM 41c) capable of retaining stored contents even when power supply is stopped;
The storage means includes a first storage area (game RAM area) in which data corresponding to the progress of the game is stored, and a second storage area in which data necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio is stored. (Non-game RAM area)
When the initialization condition is established, the data stored in the first storage area (game RAM area) is initialized while the data stored in the second storage area (non-game RAM area) Is characterized by not being initialized.
According to this feature, even when the initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to calculate and notify the specific advantageous period grant ratio in consideration of the previous data.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-11 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
Advantageous control means for controlling advantageously for the player (control of BB, RB, advantageous section by the main control unit 41),
The number of games controlled advantageously in the specific period of the specific number of games in the specific period (the past 6000 games, the factory shipment or the period from when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason until the present) A calculation means for calculating a specific advantageous period game number ratio (advantageous section ratio) that is a ratio of a specific advantageous game number (advantageous section game number) that is (BB, RB, number of games controlled to an advantageous section);
A notification means (game machine information display 50) for notifying the specific advantageous period game number ratio (advantageous section ratio) calculated by the calculating means;
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, the ratio of the number of specific advantageous period games, which is the ratio of the number of specific advantageous games, which is the number of games controlled advantageously among the specific period, which is the number of games in the specific period, is calculated and notified. Since it is informed so as to be specified by the means, it can be confirmed whether or not it is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value even after being shipped to the market.

  Note that in the configurations 1-1 and 1-11, “advantageous control for the player” means that the probability that a specific winning is allowed, the probability that a specific winning occurs, and the probability that a privilege advantageous to the player is given. And control for notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-12 is the gaming machine according to Configuration 1-11,
The notification means (game machine information display 50) is configured so as not to disturb the visibility (in the inside of the housing 1a, for example, a component such as a reel at the display side position of the game machine information display 50). In general, no other boards are provided, and wiring that connects electronic components does not pass through.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the visibility of the notification unit is not hindered, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the control is advantageously controlled based on the design value.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-13 is the gaming machine according to configuration 1-11 or 1-12,
Events that may cause the ratio of the number of games for the specified advantageous period to be inadequate (for example, a bonus or advantageous period was forcibly terminated during a bonus, advantageous period, or bonus carryover) , Detecting that the bonus being carried over has been cleared, the game has been played more than the prescribed number while the bonus is being carried over, or the operation to intentionally terminate the advantageous section has occurred) It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is detected that an event has occurred that may cause the notified specific advantageous period game number ratio to be inappropriate, so that the notified specific advantageous period game number ratio is not appropriate. It can prevent fraud.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-11 to 1-13,
Excess avoidance means (overflow) for avoiding that the numerical value (total data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for the calculation means to calculate the ratio of the number of games of the specific advantageous period exceeds the upper limit value (a numerical value that can be expressed by 3 bytes) It is characterized by having a process that avoids the above.
According to this feature, it is avoided that the numerical value necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period game number ratio exceeds the upper limit value. Therefore, the numerical value necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period game number ratio has an upper limit value. Even if the situation is exceeded, the specific advantageous period game number ratio can be notified.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-11 to 1-14,
The notification means notifies a plurality of types of information including a specific advantageous period game number ratio periodically (every 30 seconds) and is updated at the same time as a plurality of types of information notified in one cycle. It is characterized by notifying information.
According to this feature, since a plurality of types of information including the specific advantage period game number ratio are periodically switched and notified, a large amount of information can be notified efficiently and a plurality of information notified in one cycle Since the information updated at the same time is notified as the type of information, it is possible to prevent information of different times from being mixed in one cycle.

A gaming machine of configuration 1-16 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 1-11 to 1-15,
The calculating means includes an initialization notifying means (game machine information display 50) for notifying that a numerical value necessary for calculating a specific advantageous period game number ratio has been initialized.
According to this feature, it is notified by the initialization notification means that the numerical value necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period game number ratio has been initialized, so that it is necessary to calculate the specific advantageous period game number ratio. It is possible to recognize the possibility that the specific advantage period game number ratio is not a normal value because the numerical value is initialized.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-11 to 1-16,
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
A display result can be derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portions (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a winning can be generated according to the display result,
A numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for the calculation means to calculate the ratio of the number of games of a specific advantageous period;
The numerical value updating means waits for the completion of the provision of the game value (medal) when the display result (the combination of the symbols of the small role) is derived in which the prize winning accompanied with the provision of the game value (medal) is derived. It is characterized by the fact that the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating the ratio of the number of games of specific advantageous period (advantageous section ratio) is updated without any change.
According to this feature, when a display result in which a winning prize is generated is derived, the numerical value necessary for calculating the ratio of the number of games for a specific advantageous period is updated without waiting for the completion of the provision of gaming value. be able to.

A gaming machine of configuration 1-18 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 1-11 to 1-16,
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
A display result can be derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portions (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a winning can be generated according to the display result,
The calculating means includes numerical value updating means for updating a numerical value (total data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating a specific advantageous period game number ratio (advantageous section ratio),
The numerical value updating means waits for the completion of the provision of the game value (medal) when the display result (the combination of symbols of the small role) is derived in which the award winning accompanied with the provision of the game value (medal) is derived. It is characterized by updating the numerical values (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary to calculate the ratio of the number of games with specific advantageous period (advantageous section ratio).
According to this feature, when a display result in which a winning prize is generated is derived, updating a numerical value necessary for calculating a ratio of the number of games for a specific advantageous period after the provision of the game value is actually completed. Can do.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-11 to 1-18,
Predetermined number of games controlled advantageously (BB, RB, number of games controlled in the advantageous section) in a predetermined period (400 games) divided by a predetermined number (15) over a specific period (between 6000 games) A predetermined advantageous period game number storage area for storing the advantageous period game number (advantageous section game number) is provided in a predetermined number (15) or more (ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers),
The calculating means stores a predetermined advantage stored in a predetermined advantageous period game number storage area (a ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers) for a predetermined advantageous number of games (the number of advantageous interval games between the past 6000 games). It is characterized by being calculated by adding up the number of games for the period (number of games in the advantageous section).
According to this feature, the number of specific advantageous period games in the most recent specific period can be easily calculated.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 1-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 1-11 to 1-19,
Comprising storage means (RAM 41c) capable of retaining stored contents even when power supply is stopped;
The storage means stores a first storage area (game RAM area) in which data corresponding to the progress of the game is stored, and a second storage in which data necessary for calculating the ratio of the number of games for a specific advantageous period is stored. An area (non-game RAM area),
The data stored in the first storage area (game RAM area) is initialized when the initialization condition (setting change operation, etc.) is established, while the second storage area The data stored in the (non-game RAM area) is not initialized.
According to this feature, even when the initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to calculate and notify the number of games of a specific advantageous period in consideration of data before that.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-21 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 1-1 to 1-20,
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
A game control board (game control board 40) on which the game control means is mounted;
A board case (board case 120a) that accommodates the game control board and cannot be opened without leaving a trace;
With
The notification means (game machine information display 50) is mounted on the game control board (game control board 40), and the notification contents can be confirmed in a state where the game control board is accommodated in the board case. (In the board case 120a, a seal part, an entry part for filling in an unsealed person, a label for management information, a sticking part to which the label is stuck, a display part on which management information etc. is printed and stamped, a heat radiation hole And parts such as a fan for heat dissipation are provided avoiding the display side position of the gaming machine information display 50)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the notification means is mounted on the game control board, and the notification contents can be confirmed in a state where the game control board is accommodated in the unopenable board case without leaving a trace. It is possible to prevent the means from being tampered with.

  As a conventional gaming machine, for example, a program related to the progress of a game for performing a lottery or operation of each part in accordance with the player's operation, and an abnormality detection that is not directly related to the progress of the game (for example, an abnormal prize determination) ) Etc. are stored together in one storage area, but a program related to the progress of a game and a program not directly related to the progress of the game are mixed in one storage area. It was difficult to determine which program was related to the progress of the game.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily distinguishing between a program related to the progress of a game and a program not related to the progress of the game. To do.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b, RAM 41c) having a storage area capable of storing data;
Permitted area setting means (setting based on the HW parameter by the main control unit 41) capable of setting an area for permitting predetermined control (running of the program, data access) in the storage area;
With
The storage area is
A first storage area (game program area) for storing a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game;
A second storage area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) that is called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored;
An unused area allocated to an area immediately before a rear storage area (non-game program area) allocated behind the first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area). Unused area 1)
Including
The permission area setting means sets the predetermined control (program running, data access) for each of the first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a first storage area that stores a game program related to the progress of the game, and a second storage area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program not related to the progress of the game; Are allocated separately, and an unused area is allocated to the area before the rear storage area allocated behind the first storage area and the second storage area. The game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area. Further, since the predetermined control is permitted only for the area set by the permission area setting means in the storage area, and each of the first storage area and the second storage area is set as an area for which the predetermined control is permitted. It is possible to prevent unintended control due to or illegal data.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-2 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b, RAM 41c) having a storage area capable of storing data;
Permitted area setting means (setting based on the HW parameter by the main control unit 41) capable of setting an area for permitting predetermined control (running of the program, data access) in the storage area;
With
The storage area is
A first storage area (game program area) for storing a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game;
A second storage area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) that is called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored;
An unused area allocated to an area immediately before a rear storage area (non-game program area) allocated behind the first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area). Unused area 1)
Including
Out of the first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area), from the forward storage area (game program area) allocated ahead to the rear storage area (non-game program area) It is characterized in that the area is set as an area permitting the predetermined control (program running, data access) in a lump.
According to this feature, a first storage area that stores a game program related to the progress of the game, and a second storage area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program not related to the progress of the game; Are allocated separately, and an unused area is allocated to the area before the rear storage area allocated behind the first storage area and the second storage area. The game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area. In addition, predetermined control is permitted only in the storage area set by the permission area setting means, and the rear assigned from the front storage area assigned to the front of the first storage area and the second storage area. Since the area up to the storage area is collectively set as an area for which predetermined control is permitted, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data.

In the configurations 2-1 and 2-2, before and after the storage area is a magnitude relationship between the address values assigned to the storage area. The smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. For this reason, the rear storage area allocated behind the first storage area and the second storage area in the means 1 and 2 is the address value allocated among the first storage area and the second storage area. This corresponds to the storage area with the larger. Further, the forward storage area allocated forward in the first storage area and the second storage area in the means 2 is the smaller one of the allocated address values in the first storage area and the second storage area. This corresponds to the storage area.
In the configurations 2-1 and 2-2, any configuration may be used as long as the unused area is allocated before the rear storage area, and the front storage area, the unused area, and the rear storage area may be allocated adjacent to each other. In addition, another storage area may be allocated between the front storage area and the unused area.
In addition, in the configurations 2-1 and 2-2, setting the area that allows the predetermined control may be the setting of the area that permits the predetermined control, or the setting of the area that prohibits the predetermined control. As a result, an area where predetermined control is permitted may be set.
Also, in the configuration 2-1, when setting each of the first storage area and the second storage area as the area for which the predetermined control is permitted, when setting these areas, the predetermined control is performed only for the area. It may be set as a permitted area, or may be set as an area where the predetermined control is permitted together with other areas adjacent to the area.
Further, in the configuration 2-2, when the area from the front storage area allocated ahead of the first storage area and the second storage area to the rear storage area is set as an area that permits the predetermined control collectively. When setting the area, only the area from the front storage area to the rear storage area may be collectively set as an area allowing the predetermined control, or the area from the front storage area to the rear storage area may be set. Other adjacent areas may be collectively set as an area allowing the predetermined control.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-3 is the gaming machine described in configuration 2-1 or 2-2,
The predetermined control is control (data access) for accessing a storage area (program / data area).
According to this feature, control for accessing an area other than the area set by the allowed area setting unit in the storage area is not permitted, and therefore it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data from being performed.

A gaming machine having configuration 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 2-1 to 2-3,
The predetermined control is control (running of a program) for executing a program stored in a storage area (program).
According to this feature, since control for executing a program stored in an area other than the area set by the permitted area setting unit in the storage area is not permitted, unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is performed. Can be prevented.

A gaming machine of configuration 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 2-1 to 2-4,
The unused area is characterized in that a specific value (0) is stored in all areas.
According to this feature, since specific values are stored in all the unused areas, the first storage area, the second storage area, and the unused areas can be easily distinguished from each other, and the unused areas Even when invalid data is stored in the area, it can be easily detected.

A gaming machine of configuration 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 2-1 to 2-5,
Each of the first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area) is an area starting from an address (0H) having the same value in the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits. It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first storage area and the second storage area can be easily distinguished from other areas.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 2-1 to 2-6,
Based on the upper address and the lower address, an address corresponding to the area in which the program to be called is stored is specified, and a calling means (CALLV instruction) for calling the program from the area corresponding to the specified address;
Storage means (vector table) for storing the specific value (08H);
With
A specific program (subroutine frequently used) of the game program (game program) or the non-game program (non-game program) is stored in an area corresponding to the address of the specific value (08H). And
The calling unit specifies an upper address based on a specific value (08H) stored in the storage unit (vector table) when calling the specific program (subroutine that is frequently used), and specifies a specified lower level It is characterized by specifying an address.
According to this feature, an upper address that constitutes a part of an address used when calling a specific program of a game program or a non-game program is stored in the storage means in advance as a specific value, and is stored in the storage means. Since the address is specified based on the specific value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the specific program.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 2-1 to 2-7,
Interrupt processing execution means for executing processing (timer interrupt processing (main)) according to the interrupt program based on the interrupt;
Address storage means (vector table) capable of storing the address of the interrupt program (timer interrupt processing (main));
Determining means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (area in which a program or the like is actually stored in the program area);
Activation restriction means for restricting activation when it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within a predetermined range (the main control unit 41 has a vector table address within a program area such as a program Do not start if it is not the actual storage area),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, unintended interrupt processing can be prevented in advance.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-9 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 2-1 to 2-8,
Setting means for setting the control means (setting of various functions performed with reference to the HW parameters);
Processing means for executing processing based on a control program (game program or non-game program) after setting by the setting means;
Interrupt generation means (timer circuit 509) for generating an interrupt in response to the establishment of the interrupt condition;
An interrupt process execution means for executing an interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)) based on the interrupt;
Interrupt limiting means for limiting the generation of interrupts by the interrupt generating means;
Including
The interrupt restricting means includes first interrupt restricting means (setting of prohibition of interrupt by setting at start-up) for restricting generation of interrupts before processing based on the control program (initial setting process) is started. , Second interrupt limiting means for limiting the generation of interrupts at the start of processing based on the control program (setting of interrupt prohibition by initial setting processing).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt from occurring.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
First storage means (ROM 41b) having a first storage area (game program area, non-game program area) capable of storing a program (game program, non-game program);
Control means (main control unit 41) for performing control based on the program stored in the first storage means;
Second storage means (RAM 41c) having a second storage area (game RAM area, non-game RAM area) capable of storing variation data used when the control means performs control based on the program;
With
The first storage area is
A game program area (game program area) in which a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-game program area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored;
Including
The second storage area is
A game variation data area (game RAM area) capable of storing game variation data used when the control means performs control based on the game program;
A non-game variation data area (non-game RAM area) capable of storing non-game variation data used when the control means performs control based on the non-game program;
Including
When the first initialization condition is satisfied (at the end of one game, at the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, after the end of setting change), the control means When the second initialization condition (when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change or when there is an abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change) is initialized at least part of the game RAM area) It is characterized in that at least a part of the variable data area (game RAM area) for use is initialized and at least a part of the non-game variable data area (non-game RAM area) is initialized.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, Since these are assigned separately, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area. Also, a game variation data area that can store game variation data used when performing control based on a game program, and a non-game variation data region that can store non-game variation data used when performing control based on a non-game program. Since the fluctuation data area is assigned separately, the game fluctuation data and the non-game fluctuation data can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area, and the control means It is possible to initialize only the game variable data area according to the difference in the conversion conditions, or to initialize both the game variable area and the non-game variable data area. Can be initialized.

In the configuration 3-1, the control means may be any means as long as it initializes at least a part of the game variation data area when the first initialization condition is satisfied. This area may be initialized.
In the configuration 3-1, the control unit initializes at least a part of the game variation data area when the second initialization condition is satisfied, and at least a part of the non-game change data area. It may be anything that is initialized, may be one that initializes all areas of the game variation data area, may be one that initializes all areas of the non-game data area, All of the variable data area and the non-game data area may be initialized.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-2 is the gaming machine described in configuration 3-1,
A program (game area initialization process) for initializing the game variable data area (game RAM area) and a program (non-game area initialization process) for initializing the non-game variable data area (non-game RAM area) ) Is a separate program.
According to this feature, since the game program does not need to initialize the non-game variable data area, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. Also, the program for initializing the game variation data area can be shared both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 3-1 or 3-2,
The first initialization condition is characterized in that it is satisfied for each gaming unit (at the end of one game).
According to this feature, unnecessary game variation data relating to the progress of the game can be initialized for each game unit.

A gaming machine of configuration 3-4 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 3-1 to 3-3,
The second initialization condition is characterized in that it is established based on the fact that the initialization operation (setting change operation) has been performed.
According to this feature, both the game variation data and the non-game variation data can be initialized based on the initialization operation of the game clerk.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 3-1 to 3-4,
The game variation data area includes an unused area (unused area 3) that is not used when performing control based on the game program or when performing control based on the non-game program,
The control means includes the first initialization condition (at the end of one game, at the end of a specific gaming state and at the end of one game, after the end of setting change) or the second initialization condition (setting change). At least one of the unused area (unused area 3) is initialized when at least one of RAM is normal at the start and when there is an abnormality at the start of setting change) It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-6 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 3-1 to 3-5,
Interrupts are prohibited during execution of the non-game program.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated due to an unintended process being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-7 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 3-1 to 3-6,
The second storage area separately includes a stack area (game stack area) for saving data used by the game program and a stack area (non-game stack area) for saving data used by the non-game program. It is characterized by.
According to this feature, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are saved in the stack areas separately provided, so that the management of the stack area becomes easy.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-8 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 3-1 to 3-7,
An address storage means (vector table) capable of storing an address of an interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)) for executing an interrupt process;
Determining means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (area in which a program or the like is actually stored in the program area);
Activation restriction means for restricting activation when it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within a predetermined range (the main control unit 41 has a vector table address within a program area such as a program Do not start if it is not the actual storage area),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, unintended interrupt processing can be prevented in advance.

A gaming machine of Configuration 3-9 is the gaming machine according to any of Configurations 3-1 to 3-8,
Comprising setting means for setting the control means (setting of various functions performed with reference to HW parameters);
The control means executes processing based on a program (game program or non-game program) after setting by the setting means, and prohibits interruption before starting processing based on the program (startup) Setting of prohibition of interrupt by hour setting)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt from occurring.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-1
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
First storage means (ROM 41b) having a first storage area (game program area, non-game program area) capable of storing a program (game program, non-game program);
Control means (main control unit 41) for performing control based on the program stored in the first storage means;
Second storage means (RAM 41c) having a second storage area (game RAM area, non-game RAM area) capable of storing variation data used when the control means performs control based on the program;
Holding means (backup power supply) for holding data stored in the second storage area stage (RAM 41c) for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
With
The first storage area stage (ROM 41b)
A game program area (game program area) in which a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-game program area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored;
Including
The second storage area (RAM 41c)
A game variation data area (game RAM area) capable of storing game variation data used when the control means performs control based on the game program;
A non-game variation data area (non-game RAM area) capable of storing non-game variation data used when the control means performs control based on the non-game program;
Including
The control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, out of the data held in the second storage area (RAM 41c) by the holding means (backup power supply), the game variation data area (game) Based on the game variation data stored in the (RAM area), it is determined whether or not the stored content is normal (determination of whether or not the RAM is destroyed). Control is started based on the game fluctuation data stored in the data area (game RAM area) and the non-game change data stored in the non-game change data area (non-game RAM area). It is said.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, Since these are assigned separately, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area. Also, a game variation data area that can store game variation data used when performing control based on a game program, and a non-game variation data region that can store non-game variation data used when performing control based on a non-game program. Since the fluctuation data area is assigned separately, the game fluctuation data and the non-game fluctuation data can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area, and the control means Whether or not the stored content is normal based on the game variation data stored in the game variation data area among the data stored in the second storage area by the holding means when power supply to the machine is started When the game is determined to be normal, the game variation data stored in the game variation data and the game variation data stored in the non-game variation data are used. Control is resumed, and it is ensured that the progress of the game can be performed normally by omitting the determination of whether or not the non-game data that does not interfere with the progress of the game is normal. Can reduce the load.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-2 is the gaming machine described in configuration 4-1,
The game variation data area (game RAM area) is not used when performing control based on the game program (game program) or when performing control based on the non-game program (non-game program). Including unused area (unused area 3),
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the control means determines whether or not the stored contents including the unused area (unused area 3) in the gaming variation data area (game RAM area) are normal. It is characterized by judging.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 4-1 or 4-2,
When it is determined that the stored content is not normal, the control means controls to an error state (error processing), and when the error state is canceled, the game variation data area (game RAM area) and the non-storage It is characterized by initializing both the game variation data area (non-game RAM area).
According to this feature, when it is determined that the stored content is not normal, it is not automatically restored and is controlled to an error state. Since both of the variation data are initialized, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in either the game variation data or the non-game data.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-4 is the gaming machine according to configuration 4-1 or 4-2,
When it is determined that the stored contents are not normal (when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed), the control means is configured to change the game variable data area (game RAM area) and the non-game variable data area ( It is characterized by initializing both non-game RAM areas.
According to this feature, when it is determined that the stored content is not normal, both the game variation data and the non-game variation data are initialized, so either the game variation data or the non-game data is abnormal. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with the occurrence of

A gaming machine of configuration 4-5 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 4-1 to 4-4,
The control means prohibits access to both the game variable data area (game RAM area) and the non-game variable data area (non-game RAM area) when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped ( (Setting of prohibition of access to RAM 41c in power interruption processing)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, not only the game variable data area used for determining whether the stored content is normal, but also access to the non-game variable data area is prohibited, so the non-game variable data area is used. Thus, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored.

A gaming machine of configuration 4-6 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 4-1 to 4-5,
Interrupts are prohibited during execution of the non-game program (interrupts are set to be prohibited before calling the non-game program).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated due to an unintended process being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-7 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 4-1 to 4-6,
The second storage area includes a stack area (game stack area) for saving data used by the game program (game program) and a stack area (non-game stack) for saving data used by the non-game program (non-game program). And a separate area).
According to this feature, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are saved in the stack areas separately provided, so that the management of the stack area becomes easy.

A gaming machine having configuration 4-8 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 4-1 to 4-7,
An address storage means (vector table) capable of storing an address of an interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)) for executing an interrupt process;
Determining means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (area in which a program or the like is actually stored in the program area);
Activation restriction means for restricting activation when it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within a predetermined range (the main control unit 41 has a vector table address within a program area such as a program Do not start if it is not the actual storage area),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, unintended interrupt processing can be prevented in advance.

A gaming machine having configuration 4-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 4-1 to 4-8,
Comprising setting means for setting the control means (setting of various functions performed with reference to HW parameters);
The control means executes processing based on a program (game program or non-game program) after setting by the setting means, and prohibits interruption before starting processing based on the program (startup) Setting of prohibition of interrupt by hour setting)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt from occurring.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-1
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b) having a storage area (game program area, non-game program area) capable of storing a program (game program, non-game program);
Control means (main control unit 41) for performing control based on a program stored in the storage means;
With
The storage area is
A game program area (game program area) in which a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-game program area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored;
Including
The control means includes
The basic process (main process) based on the game program is executed, the basic process is interrupted at predetermined time intervals, and the interrupt process based on the game program (timer interrupt process (main)) is executed.
The non-game program may be called from both the basic process (main process) and the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)).
When calling the non-game program from the basic process (main process), interrupts of other processes are prohibited (calling the non-game program by setting interrupts to be prohibited), and the interrupt process (timer interrupt) When calling the non-game program from the process (main), do not prohibit interrupts for other processes (call the non-game program without setting the interrupt to disabled)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, Since these are assigned separately, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area. In addition, when calling a non-game program from the basic process, interrupts of other processes are prohibited, while when calling a non-game program from the interrupt process, that is, in a situation where the possibility of further interruption is low, Since interrupts of other processes are not prohibited when calling, it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the prohibition of interrupts while preventing malfunctions caused by interrupts being executed during the execution of non-game programs.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-2 is the gaming machine described in configuration 5-1,
In the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)), the control means includes a non-game program (e.g., an LED dynamic display process) before a predetermined process (for example, LED dynamic display process) among a plurality of processes constituting the interrupt process. For example, it is characterized by calling normal command transmission processing.
According to this feature, since the non-game program is called as early as possible among the plurality of processes constituting the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the interrupt from being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 5-1 or 5-2,
A stack area (game stack area) for saving data used by the game program and a stack area (non-game stack area) for saving data used by the non-game program are separately provided.
According to this feature, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are saved in the stack areas separately provided, so that the management of the stack area becomes easy.

A gaming machine having configuration 5-4 is the gaming machine according to any of means configurations 5-1 to 5-3,
When the non-game program (non-game program) is executed, the control means saves a register value used in the game program (game program) to a stack area (game stack area), and then executes the non-game program. It is characterized by executing processing in a program (non-game program).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the register value used by the game program from being changed as the non-game program is executed.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-5 is the gaming machine according to configuration 5-4,
When the non-game program (non-game program) is executed, the control means saves a register value used in the game program (game program) to a stack area (game stack area) (common call) It is characterized by calling process 1 and call common process 2).
According to this feature, since the program to be executed when executing the non-game program is shared, the program capacity can be reduced.

A gaming machine of configuration 5-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 5-1 to 5-5,
Address storage means (vector table) capable of storing an address of an interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)) for executing the interrupt process;
Determining means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (area in which a program or the like is actually stored in the program area);
Activation restriction means for restricting activation when it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within a predetermined range (the main control unit 41 has a vector table address within a program area such as a program Do not start if it is not the actual storage area),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, unintended interrupt processing can be prevented in advance.

A gaming machine of configuration 5-7 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 5-1 to 5-6,
Comprising setting means for setting the control means (setting of various functions performed with reference to HW parameters);
The control means executes processing based on a program (game program or non-game program) after setting by the setting means, and prohibits interruption before starting processing based on the program (startup) Setting of prohibition of interrupt by hour setting)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt from occurring.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that performs a game,
Storage means (ROM 41b) having a storage area (game program area, non-game program area) capable of storing a program (game program, non-game program);
Control means (main control unit 41) for performing control based on a program stored in the storage means;
With
The storage area is
A game program area (game program area) in which a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored;
A non-game program area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) which is a program called by the game program and is not involved in the progress of the game is stored;
Including
The control means includes
The basic process (main process) based on the game program is executed, the basic process is interrupted at predetermined time intervals, and the interrupt process based on the game program (timer interrupt process (main)) is executed.
The non-game program may be called from both the basic process (main process) and the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)).
Even when the non-game program (non-game program area) is called from the basic process (main process), the non-game program (non-game program area) is called from the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)). Sometimes it is characterized by prohibiting interrupts of other processes.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, Since these are assigned separately, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area. In addition, when calling a non-game program from the basic process or when calling a non-game program from the interrupt process, interrupts of other processes are prohibited, so interrupts are executed during the execution of the non-game program. Malfunction can be prevented.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-2 is the gaming machine described in configuration 6-1,
When the control means calls the non-game program (non-game program area) from the basic process (main process), the control means cancels the prohibition of interruption with the end of the non-game program (non-game program area), When the non-game program (non-game program area) is called from the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)), the prohibition of interrupt should be maintained even after the non-game program (non-game program area) ends. It is characterized by.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the prohibition of the interrupt from being released due to the execution of the non-game program even during the execution of the interrupt process.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 6-1 or 6-2,
A stack area (game stack area) for saving data used by the game program (game program area), and a stack area (non-game stack area) for saving data used by the non-game program (non-game program area). It is characterized by being prepared separately.
According to this feature, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are saved in the stack areas separately provided, so that the management of the stack area becomes easy.

A gaming machine having configuration 6-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 6-1 to 6-3,
The control means, when executing the non-game program (non-game program area), after saving the register value used in the game program (game program area) to the stack area (game stack area), It is characterized by executing processing in a non-game program (non-game program area).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the register value used by the game program from being changed as the non-game program is executed.

A gaming machine having configuration 6-5 is the gaming machine according to configuration 6-4,
When the non-game program (non-game program area) is executed, the control means saves a register value used in the game program (game program area) to a stack area (game stack area) ( It is characterized by calling common call processing 1 and common call processing 3).
According to this feature, since the program to be executed when executing the non-game program is shared, the program capacity can be reduced.

A gaming machine of configuration 6-6 is the gaming machine according to any of configurations 6-1 to 6-5,
Address storage means (vector table) capable of storing an address of an interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)) for executing the interrupt process;
Determining means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (area in which a program or the like is actually stored in the program area);
Activation restriction means for restricting activation when it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within a predetermined range (the main control unit 41 has a vector table address within a program area such as a program Do not start if it is not the actual storage area),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, unintended interrupt processing can be prevented in advance.

A gaming machine according to Configuration 6-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Configurations 6-1 to 6-6,
Comprising setting means for setting the control means (setting of various functions performed with reference to HW parameters);
The control means executes processing based on a program (game program or non-game program) after setting by the setting means, and prohibits interruption before starting processing based on the program (startup) Setting of prohibition of interrupt by hour setting)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt from occurring.

The gaming machine of configuration 7 includes configuration 2-1 to 2-9, configuration 3-1 to 3-9, configuration 4-1 to 4-9, configuration 5-1 to 5-7, and configuration 6-1 to 7. A gaming machine according to any of the above,
A plurality of timer value storage areas (for example, 1-byte timers A to C);
When any type of timing condition is satisfied among a plurality of types of timing conditions (for example, timing conditions for 1-byte timers A to C), a timer value storage area (for example, 1-byte timer A) corresponding to the timing condition To C), a timer value storage means (main process) for storing a timer value according to the timing condition;
Timer value updating means (time counter updating process) capable of updating timer values stored in a plurality of timer value storage areas (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) at predetermined intervals (about 2.24 ms);
With
A plurality of timer value storage areas (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) are assigned consecutive addresses (804CH to 804EH) according to a predetermined rule (+1),
The timer value updating means performs a predetermined operation (specified address + 1) for an update process for updating the timer value stored in the timer value storage area corresponding to the specified address (a process for subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the pointer). It is characterized in that multiple types of timer values can be updated by repeatedly executing while changing the designated address for the timer value storage area.
According to this feature, a plurality of timer value storage areas are assigned consecutive addresses according to a predetermined rule, and an update process for updating the timer value stored in the timer value storage area corresponding to the specified address is performed in a predetermined manner. When the processing for updating multiple types of timer values is performed for each type of timer value, it is possible to update multiple types of timer values by repeatedly executing while changing the specified address for the timer value storage area. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced.
Note that consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule means that, for example, an address that is incremented by N (N is a natural number) from the start address and the start address is assigned.
In addition, changing the designated address for the timer value storage area by performing a predetermined calculation is, for example, changing the designated address by adding or subtracting a value according to the number of processes to the current designated address, This corresponds to changing the designated address by adding or subtracting a constant to or from the reference address. At this time, the value or constant according to the number of processes may vary depending on the storage capacity of the timer value. For example, if the timer value is stored byte by byte, the value according to the number of processes is the number of processes. Depending on the number of processing, the value is 2, 4, 6,..., Depending on the number of processing. The constant is 2.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, the combined payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the payout between the past 6000 games. The gaming machine information display 50 displays the ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the combined payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number. However, instead of this, a sub-control unit for performing an effect may perform display control.
In addition, the main control unit 41 uses the ring buffer as data relating to game winnings, as a total payout number that is the total number of medals awarded in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment), a specific period (this In the embodiment, the number of bonus payouts, which is the number of medals awarded during the period controlled by BB or RB in 6000 games), the period controlled by BB in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). The number of medals awarded to the player, the number of consecutive payouts, and an advantageous period controlled by the AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) (after winning the AT and then being controlled by the AT, the remaining games of the AT The number of medals awarded in the period until the number becomes 0 and the control of the AT is finished), the advantageous section payout number, which is the specific period (in this embodiment, 000 games), which is the number of games in the advantageous period controlled by the AT (the period from when the AT is won to when the AT is controlled until the AT remaining game count becomes 0 and the AT control is terminated) Although it is configured to count the number of games, in place of this format, in the present invention, a format having only two types of total cumulative numbers as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57 can be adopted. Specifically, it has a total cumulative storage RWM 10000 and a total cumulative storage RWM 10001, and accumulates and stores data related to game winnings in each game, RWM 10000 and 10001. Furthermore, by deleting the information related to game winnings at a predetermined opportunity for the total cumulative storage RWM 10000, the combined payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio calculated based on the total from the erased timing to the present are as follows: Can be displayed as the short-term consecutive component payout ratio and the short-term feature payout ratio, and the combined consecutive component payout ratio and the calculated feature payout rate calculated based on the total of the RWM 10001 for total cumulative storage are the cumulative consecutive payout rate, cumulative It can be displayed as an item payout ratio. With this configuration, it is only necessary to have a plurality of storage areas for accumulating and storing information related to game winnings, and a process for storing and updating a certain amount of information like a ring buffer is unnecessary. This is preferable.

  As a predetermined trigger, for example, power ON / OFF can be triggered. According to this, it is possible to collect information on game winnings from the power-on, that is, to display the daily consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio as the short-term consecutive payout ratio and the short-term bonus payout ratio. Can do. Also, in this case, an RWM10002 is provided to save the accumulated value of the total accumulated storage RWM10000 when deleted, and the accumulated value of the RWM10002 is displayed as a short-term combined payout ratio and a short-term bonus payout ratio. In this case, it is possible to display the short-term consecutive service payout ratio and the short-term service payout ratio for one day before the power is turned on. In addition, by using a real-time clock or the like as a predetermined opportunity, for example, it is also possible to accurately add up the short-term consecutive component payout ratio and the short-term accessory payout ratio such as one day or one hour.

Moreover, as a predetermined opportunity, it can be set as an opportunity regarding games, such as a setting change, a door opening, or a sensor which detects a player. According to this, even if it is not a period of one day as when the power is turned on, the short-term combined payout ratio in a predetermined period (such as between setting change and setting change or between door opening and door opening) In addition, it is preferable because the short-term component payout ratio can be displayed. Further, the same effect can be obtained even if the predetermined trigger is triggered when the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of big hits reaches the predetermined number.
Instead of the configuration having two RWMs such as RWM10000 and 10001, two regions may be formed in the RWM region of the memory space.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 58 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, an area 20000 for collecting and summing up data related to game wins for each game, and areas B1 and 800G for accumulating results of information related to game wins in the 400Gth are stored. An area B15 for storing an accumulation result of information related to winning of the game B2, 1200,..., 6000th game is provided. In the area 20000, information related to game winnings is added and updated, and data related to game winnings accumulated in the area 20000 and stored on the condition that it is 400G (specific period ( In this embodiment, the total number of payouts, which is the total number of medals awarded in 6000 games), and the number of medals awarded in the period controlled by BB or RB in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). In the specified period (6000 games in this embodiment), the number of medals given during the period controlled by the BB in the specified period (6000 games in this embodiment), the specified period (6000 games in this embodiment). ) In the advantageous section controlled by the AT (after winning the AT, the number of games remaining in the AT is 0 after the AT is controlled, and the AT control is terminated) Advantageous period payout number, which is the number of medals awarded in the period up to), and an advantageous period controlled by AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) (after winning AT and then controlled by AT) The value of the number of games in the game section) is stored in the area B1 until the AT remaining game count becomes 0 and the AT control is terminated. Furthermore, on the condition that it becomes 800G, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2, and the data related to the winning of the game accumulated in the area 20000 is stored in the area B1. In this way, the information of the area 20000 is put into the area B1 every 400G, and the information of the other areas is shifted. Further, after the 6400th time, control is performed so that the information related to the game winnings stored in the area B14 is erased and the information in the area B13 is transferred to the area B14.

  By configuring in this way, the combined service payout ratio and the accessory payout ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the area 20000 can be displayed as the cumulative consecutive service payout ratio and the cumulative accessory payout ratio. Also, by subtracting the value of the area B10 from the area 20000, the most recent 6000G (that is, approximately 10 hours) consecutive payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio are displayed as the short-term consecutive payout ratio and the short-term bonus payout ratio. Can do. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 20000, it is possible to display the most recent 400G (that is, approximately one hour) consecutive payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio as the short-term consecutive payout ratio and the short-term bonus payout ratio. it can.

  Further, instead of the configuration as shown in FIG. 58, only the region B10 may be provided as shown in FIG. According to this, although it is not possible to obtain a detailed combined payout ratio and an accessory payout ratio of about one hour, the short-term consecutive payout ratio and the short-term accessory payout ratio of the latest 6000G (approximately 10 hours) are displayed. Therefore, it is preferable that the capacity is small.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 60 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it has a total cumulative storage RWM30000 and a total cumulative storage RWM30001, and stores data related to game winnings in RWM30000 and 30001 in order to display the combined payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio. To go.
The total cumulative storage RWM30000 accumulates and stores from the 1G, whereas the total cumulative storage RWM30001 waits without storing from the 1G to the 6000G, and accumulates from the 6001G Try to remember. According to this, the difference between the total cumulative storage RWM30000 and the total cumulative storage RWM30001 is 6000G, and by subtracting the total cumulative storage RWM30001 from the total cumulative storage RWM30000, the consecutive combination payout ratio and the accessory discharge of 6000G The ratio can be displayed as a short-term consecutive payout ratio and a short-term bonus payout ratio. Further, the consecutive combination payout ratio and the accessory payout ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM30000 can be displayed as the cumulative consecutive service payout ratio and the cumulative accessory payout ratio.

  In the above embodiment, the format shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 61 can be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, a cumulative counter 40000, 40001, and a total cumulative counter 40002 are provided. In the total cumulative counter 40002, data on game winnings is displayed for each game from the 1Gth in order to display a combined payout ratio and an accessory payout ratio. , Keep memorized. The combined service payout ratio and the accessory payout ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative counter 40002 can be displayed as a cumulative continuous service payout ratio and a cumulative accessory payout ratio.

On the other hand, the continuous counter payout ratio and the accessory payout ratio for 6000 G are displayed as the short-term consecutive payout ratio and the short-term accessory payout ratio by the two counters of the cumulative counter 40000 and 40001. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 40000 starts the game and counting from the 1G, and clears when the 6000G is reached. On the other hand, the cumulative counter 40001 starts counting and summing up every game from the 3000th G and clears it when it reaches the 9000G. Then, when calculating the short-term consecutive service payout ratio and the short-term service payout ratio for 6000G, for example, in the 3000th to 6000G, the calculation is based on the total of the cumulative counter 40000, and in the 6001G to 9000G Is calculated based on the total of the cumulative counter 40001.
Thus, since the cumulative counters 40000 and 40001 are tabulated so as to deviate by 3000 G, when it is intended to display the short-term consecutive payout ratio and the short-term bonus payout ratio, at least within 3000 G minutes, that is, 5 hours It is possible to display the short-term consecutive payout ratio and the short-term payout ratio within the previous period. This is preferable because it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity and to display a relatively recent short-term consecutive component payout ratio and short-term accessory payout ratio.

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 start switch 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch 12 game auxiliary display 41 main control unit 41c RAM
50 gaming machine information display 91 sub-control unit 91c RAM

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
In a gaming machine capable of deriving a display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and winning can be generated according to the display result,
Game control means for controlling the game;
Production control means for producing an effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means;
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
A notification means capable of performing notification;
A design value suggesting means for indicating whether or not the player is advantageously controlled based on the design value;
With
The game control means includes
Derivation operation validation means for validating the operation of the derivation operation means when the validation condition is satisfied after the variable display of the variable display section is started,
A notification control unit capable of performing control to notify the operation mode information capable of identifying the operation mode of the derivation operation unit by the notification unit;
Including
The derivation operation validating means establishes the validation condition again after resuming the power supply when the power supply is resumed after the power supply is stopped in a state where the operation of the derivation operation means is validated. Without activating the operation of the derivation operation means until
The notification control unit resumes power supply after the power supply is stopped in a state in which the operation of the derivation operation unit is validated and control in which the notification unit notifies the operation mode information. When this is done, the gaming machine restarts the control that causes the notification means to notify the operation mode information at an earlier timing than the operation of the derivation operation means is validated.